2009 Chevrolet Corvette Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols
instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a
specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Front Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters
To adjust a power seat:
On vehicles with power lumbar and side bolsters:
Move (A) forward or rearward to adjust lumbar support.
Move (B) up or down to adjust the side bolsters.
• Move the control forward or rearward to adjust the
seat forward or rearward.
• Move the front or rear of the control up or down to
adjust the height of the seat cushion.
Your seat position can be stored and recalled if you have
the memory option. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save seating positions in the memory:
Heated Seats
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, both outside mirrors, and
the telescopic steering column to a comfortable
driving position.
On vehicles with heated seats, the buttons are located
on the center console.
The ignition must be on for this feature to work.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let you know
that the position has been stored in the memory.
L : Press to turn the seat on at the high setting, and
twice to turn it to the low setting.
A second seating, mirror, and telescopic steering column
position can be set by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
9 : Press to turn the system off.
To recall a memory position:
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, press
and release the desired button.
If the vehicle is in P (Park), a single beep sounds and
the memory position is recalled after a brief delay.
On vehicles with the memory package, the controls are
located on the driver’s door.
If the vehicle is not in P (Park), three beeps sound
and the memory position is not recalled.
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.
• On vehicles with a manual transmission, when the
vehicle is on, the parking brake needs to be set to
recall the memory position. Press and release the
desired button.
B : Recalls the easy exit position.
The numbers on the back of the keyless access
transmitters correspond to the numbers on the memory
buttons.
A single beep sounds and the memory position is
recalled after a brief delay.
If the vehicle is on and the parking brake is not set,
three beeps sound and the memory position is not
recalled.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the Auto Memory Recall, see “Auto
Memory Recall” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-73 for more information.
A second exit position can be programmed by repeating
the above steps and pressing button 2.
To recall an exit position:
To stop recall movement of the memory feature, press
one of the power seat controls, power mirror or memory
buttons, or the telescopic steering column switch.
• On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
vehicle needs to be in P (Park).
• On vehicles with a manual transmission, the
parking brake must be set.
Easy Exit Seat
B (Easy Exit Seat): This button is used to program
B : Press to recall an exit position.
and recall the desired driver’s seat exit position.
One beep will sound and the exit position for the
currently identified driver will be recalled.
To program an exit position:
1. Recall the desired driving position by pressing
button 1.
For vehicles with the Auto Exit Recall, see “Auto Exit
for more information.
2. Adjust the seat and the telescopic steering column
position to a comfortable exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button until two beeps
sound to let you know that the exit position is
now programmed.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To adjust the seatback, lean slightly forward to lift your
weight off the seatback. Pull completely up on the lever
until it stops, and lean back to position the seatback to
where you want it. Release the lever to lock the seatback
into place.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback upright, lift up on the latch and
push the seatback rearward. The seatback must be
locked in place.
Seatback Latches
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To fold a seatback forward, lift the latch located on top
of the backside of the seat. The seatback locks when
folded down.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may
be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the
right front seating position may affect the passenger
sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-51 for more information.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety
belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts
during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
and near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, for vehicles with
side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side crash.
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is
wearing them properly.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, then
return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in rear seating positions
than in the front seating positions.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every time infants and
young children ride in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other
people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the
seating surface against the
back of the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body with
the harness.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) (Coupe and
Convertible Models Only)
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have lower
attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH system
can help hold the child restraint in place during driving or
in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether
anchors designed to secure a child restraint with lower
attachments and/or a top tether.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed to
be used whether the top tether is anchored or not.
Other child restraints require that the top tether
be anchored. A national or local law may require that
the top tether be anchored.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) (Z06 and ZR1
Models Only)
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tether
anchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCH
system. If a national or local law requires that your
top tether be anchored, do not use a child restraint
in this vehicle because a top tether cannot be properly
anchored. You must use the safety belts to secure
your child restraint in this vehicle, unless a national
or local law requires that the top tether be anchored.
Refer to your child restraint instructions and instructions
in this manual for securing a child restraint using the
vehicle’s safety belts. See Securing a Child Restraint in
Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part of
the LATCH system, your child restraint may have lower
attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCH system
can help hold the child restraint in place during driving or
in a crash. Some vehicles have lower and/or top tether
anchors designed to secure a child restraint with lower
attachments and/or a top tether.
Your vehicle does not have lower anchors to
accommodate lower attachments. Your vehicle does
have a top tether anchor. If your child restraint has a
top tether, make sure your child restraint is properly
installed using the top tether anchor and the vehicle’s
safety belt. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor. Refer to your child
restraint instructions and see Securing a Child Restraint
instructions on securing your child restraint using the
vehicle’s safety belts.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to use the top tether anchors in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with a top tether.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its top
tether. The following explains how to attach a child
restraint with the top tether in your vehicle.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to
the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to
reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Tether Anchor Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
The top tether anchor is located behind the
passenger seat.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
Securing a Child Restraint with a Top
Tether
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, route
the tether over the headrest
or head restraint.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
If the position you are using
has a fixed headrest or
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route
the tether around the
1. Secure the child restraint using the vehicle’s safety
belt. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
headrest or head restraint.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the trim cover to
open the cover and expose the anchor.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
This vehicle has airbags. In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
information, including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
additional information.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
Rear-facing child restraints should not be installed in the
vehicle, even if the airbag(s) are off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), the
off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-37.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator in the
passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay
on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint ”
information.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ CAUTION:
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags
are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some
crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are
also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the
force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted airbags.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an airbag,
the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force
the object into that person causing severe injury or
even death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between an
occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near
any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation
path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors,
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle may have one or two seat position sensors,
depending on what model you have. The seat position
sensor(s) enable the sensing system to monitor the
position of the driver seat (all models except Z06 and
ZR1) and the right front passenger seat (all models).
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat position sensor(s) provide information that is used
to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced
level or at full deployment.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Your vehicle may or may not have seat-mounted side
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag
is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that
is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For seat-mounted side impact airbags, deployment
is determined by the location and severity of the side
impact.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted
side impact airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
{ CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but cannot get out of the
vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
After the frontal and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbags inflated.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn on the
hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate. You
can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn
the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible in the rearview mirror
when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
system. Improper service can mean that the airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will
be visible during the system check. When the system
check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the
symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped) under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not affected by the passenger
sensing system.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints not be transported in the
vehicle, even if the airbags are off.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped), no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped) if:
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag(s) to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags are active.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped), depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped), the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag(s) are off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped)
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
6. Restart the vehicle.
If the on indicator is still lit, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle and check with your
dealer/retailer.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped):
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag(s) off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates. We recommend
that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment except when approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
modifications that can affect how the system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
{ CAUTION:
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
the inside review mirror, front sensors, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{ CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system may not operate
properly if the original seat trim is replaced with
non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-36 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or
broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being
used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The key, located inside the
keyless access transmitter,
can be used to lock and
unlock the glove box and to
open the hatch/trunk lid if
power to the vehicle is lost.
more information.
This vehicle has a keyless access system with
for information on starting the vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lose your transmitter(s) and/or
key, it could be difficult to get into your vehicle.
You may even have to damage your vehicle to get
in. Be sure you have a spare transmitter and/or key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-7.
Keyless Access System
The Keyless Access System operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Press the button (A) near
the bottom of the keyless
access transmitter to
remove the key. Never
pull the key out without
pressing the button.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Keyless Access System Operation
The Keyless Access System transmitter functions
work up to 100 feet (30 m) away from the vehicle.
If there is a decrease in the keyless access transmitter
range, try this:
Keyless Unlocking
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. It may be necessary to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
Press the door handle sensor to unlock and open the
doors if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
additional information.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Keyless Locking
The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are
closed and at least one keyless access transmitter
has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.
To customize whether the doors automatically lock
when exiting the vehicle, see “Passive Door Locking”
additional information.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System
• Make sure that an electronic device such as a
cellular phone or lap top computer is not causing
interference.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyless Trunk Opening
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
Press K twice within five seconds to unlock both
Press the hatch/trunk release button located on the rear
of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate to open the
trunk if the keyless access transmitter is within range.
doors. The interior lamps may come on.
Pressing K also recalls the memory settings.
page 1-4 for more information.
There are other conditions that can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access
} (Hatch/Trunk): Press and hold for about
one second to unlock the hatch/trunk. If the engine
is running, the shift lever must be in P (Park) for
an automatic transmission. For a manual transmission,
the shift lever must be in NEUTRAL with the parking
brake set.
This vehicle comes with
two transmitters.
L (Panic): Press to sound the horn. Press any other
button on the keyless access transmitter to stop it.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”, if enabled
through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
page 3-73 for more information.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the doors. When Q is
pressed twice, the lights flash and the horn sounds to
confirm locking.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to this
vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and programmed through
your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed
so that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each
vehicle can have up to four transmitters programmed to it.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new transmitter.
7. Place the new transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be
with you.
8. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR #3 or 4, or
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
above the license plate.
9. To program additional transmitters, repeat Step 7.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
complete.
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2, 3 or 4.
10. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming without a Recognized
Transmitter
This procedure requires three ten minutes cycles to
complete the programming process. United States
owners are permitted to program a new transmitter to
their vehicle when a recognized transmitter is not
available. The Canadian immobilizer standard requires
that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer for
programming new transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Place the new transmitter in the glove box
transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder located
above the license plate.
4. Open the hatch/trunk.
5. Turn the key five times within five seconds.
6. The DIC message displays OFF-ACCESSORY TO
LEARN.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
14. Press Acc. on the ignition switch if programming is
complete.
8. The DIC reads WAIT 10 MINUTES and counts
down to zero.
15. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
complete the process.
9. The DIC displays OFF-ACCESSORY TO LEARN
again.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
10. Press Acc. on the ignition switch.
11. Steps 8, 9 and 10 will be repeated two more times.
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display
NO FOBS DETECTED when trying to start the vehicle.
To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in the glove
box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing the
passenger side. Then, with the vehicle in P (Park)
for an automatic transmission, press the brake pedal
12. A beep sounds and the DIC reads READY FOR
FOB #1. All previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.
13. A beep sounds once programming in complete.
The DIC displays READY FOR FOB #2.
To program additional transmitters, take transmitter 1
out of the transmitter pocket and place transmitter 2
in the pocket. Up to four transmitters can be
programmed. The DIC then displays MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED and exits the
programming mode.
and / . If the vehicle has a manual transmission, press
the clutch and / . Replace the transmitter battery as
soon as possible. Change the transmitter battery if
the DIC displays FOB BATTERY LOW.
Press Acc. on the ignition switch to complete the
process.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Doors and Locks
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
Door Locks
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked it will not open. You
increase the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked.
So, wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you
leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the slot on the side or back of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the inside, use the power door lock switch located
at the top of the door panel near both windows.
From the outside, press the lock or unlock button on
the keyless access transmitter.
To open a door from the inside, press the button (B) in
front of the door handle and push the door open. You will
hear a tone when the button is pressed.
If power to the vehicle or the keyless access transmitter
is lost, there are two ways to open the door.
Door Open to Show Location of Door Handle Sensor
When you have the transmitter with you, you may also
unlock and open the door by squeezing the door handle
sensor (A). You do not have to press the unlock button
on the transmitter. You will be able to open the door
when you press the door handle sensor and the vehicle
recognizes your keyless access transmitter. When the
passenger door is opened first, the driver’s door will also
unlock.
From inside the vehicle, use the door release handle
located on the floor next to each seat. Pull the handle up
to unlock and unlatch the door.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the doors.
There is an indicator light on the rear of the door
near the window.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed, the
light blinks twice. If the door is open, the light flashes.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.
When pressed, a beep sounds. If the door is closed
when pressed, the light comes on for a few seconds,
then turns off. If the door is open when pressed, the light
stays on.
From outside the vehicle, use the key in the cylinder
above the license plate to open the hatch then use the
door release tab located on the carpet inside the hatch on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull the tab to unlock and
information on opening the hatch during a loss of power.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the vehicle stopped and the engine running, door
unlocking can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). This allows the driver to choose
various unlock settings. For programming information,
Automatic Door Lock
The vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are
closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out
of P (Park)for automatic transmissions, or when vehicle
speed becomes faster than 8 mph (13 km/h) for manual
transmissions, both doors will lock.
Lockout Protection
Use the power door unlock switch to unlock the door
when the vehicle is not in P (Park). When the door is
closed again, the doors will lock either when your foot is
removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes
faster than 8 mph (13 km/h).
Your vehicle can be programmed to sound the horn
three times and unlock the driver door when both doors
are closed and there is a keyless access transmitter
inside the vehicle. When the driver door is opened,
a reminder chime will sound continuously. The vehicle
will remain locked only when at least one transmitter
has been removed from the vehicle and both doors are
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
The vehicle is programmed so that when the shift lever is
moved into P (Park) for automatic transmission vehicles
or when the ignition is turned OFF or is in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) for manual transmission
vehicles, both doors will unlock.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Notice: Closing the hatch/trunk lid forcefully or
from the sides can cause damage to the glass, the
defogger or the weather stripping. Be sure objects
will fit in the hatch/trunk area before closing the
hatch/trunk lid. When closing the hatch/trunk
lid, gently pull down from the center.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk
area. The objects could damage the underbody.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hatch/Trunk Lid Release
There are several ways to release the hatch/trunk lid.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park). For manual transmission
vehicles, the parking brake must be set when the
ignition is started for the hatch/trunk release to operate.
The parking brake does not need to be set when the
ignition is off for the hatch/trunk release to operate.
V (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid release
button, located on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. The theft-deterrent alarm system
must not be armed.
} (Hatch/Trunk): Press the hatch/trunk lid release
button on the keyless access transmitter. See Keyless
If your vehicle has lost battery power, open the hatch/
more information. The key lock cylinder is located on
the rear of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate.
Turn the vehicle key clockwise in the lock.
Press the hatch/trunk release button located on the rear
of the hatch/trunk lid above the license plate, as long
as you have your transmitter with you.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
Closing the Rear Compartment
(Except Convertible)
To close the rear compartment lid of your coupe, pull
down on the rear edge of the lid. Lower it until the power
pull down latch feature activates and it will close the
rest of the way and latch automatically.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the rear wall of the trunk below
the latch. This handle will glow following exposure to
light. Pull the release handle down to open the
trunk from the inside.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
(Coupe)
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
The power window switches are located on each door.
Pull up or press down on the front of the switch to
raise or lower the window.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) allows you to use
the power windows when the ignition is off. For more
page 2-24.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
Press the front of the switch to the second position to
activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop the
window as it is lowering, press the switch again.
Pull the visor toward you, or move it to the side to help
reduce glare.
To use the lighted mirror, lift the cover.
Window Indexing
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
This feature automatically lowers the window a small
amount when the door is opened. When the door is
closed, the window will raise to its full up position. If either
window does not index properly, it could be due to loss of
power. Before returning to your dealer/retailer for service,
perform the power window initialize procedure.
Theft-Deterrent System
Power Window Initialize
This vehicle has a theft-deterrent alarm system.
After a power reconnect such as battery replacement,
the window index-up feature will not function until
the system is initialized.
The security light flashes if
a door is open and locked
with the power door lock
switch.
Once power is restored:
1. Close the door.
2. Raise the window and hold the switch up for
three seconds after the window is closed.
3. Release the switch, then hold the switch up again
for three seconds and release.
If this light stays on while the engine is running, the
vehicle needs service.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Testing the Alarm
To arm the system:
To test the system:
1. Make sure the trunk lid/hatch is latched.
2. Lower the window on the driver door.
3. Manually arm the system.
• Press Q on the keyless access transmitter.
• Open the door and lock the door with the power
door lock switch. The security light should flash.
Remove the keyless access transmitter from inside
the vehicle and close the door. The security light
stops flashing and stays on. After 30 seconds,
the light should turn off.
4. Close the doors and wait 30 seconds.
5. Reach through the open window and manually pull
the release lever on the floor.
The vehicle can be programmed to automatically
lock the doors and arm the theft-deterrent system
when you exit the vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
6. Press the unlock button on the transmitter to turn
off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. See Fuses and
alarm does not go off, see your dealer/retailer.
If a door or the hatch/trunk is opened without using
the keyless access transmitter, the alarm goes off.
The horn sounds for two minutes, then goes off to
save battery power. The vehicle will not start without
a keyless access transmitter present.
Disarming the System
Press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter or squeeze the door handle sensor while the
transmitter is near the vehicle to unlock a door. Unlocking
a door any other way sets off the alarm. If the alarm
sounds, press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter to disarm it.
The theft-deterrent system does not arm if the driver
door is locked with the power door lock switch after the
doors are closed.
If the keyless access transmitter is removed from the
vehicle while a passenger is in it, have them lock
the doors after they are closed. The alarm will not arm,
so the passenger will not set it off.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Immobilizer
Immobilizer Operation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition is
turned off.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
is turned to OFF/ACCESSORY or START and a valid
transmitter is found in the vehicle.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light comes on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The system has one or more keyless access transmitters
that are matched to an immobilizer control unit in the
vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless access
transmitter starts the vehicle. The vehicle may not
start if the keyless access transmitter is damaged.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the engine does not start and the security light comes
on, there may be a problem with the immobilizer system.
Press the START button again.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle does not start and the keyless access
transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another
keyless access transmitter. Or, place the transmitter in
the transmitter pocket. See “NO FOBS DETECTED”
additional information. Check the fuse. See Fuses and
not start with the other transmitter, the vehicle needs
service. If the engine does start, the first transmitter may
be faulty. See your dealer/retailer or have a new keyless
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Follow these recommended guidelines during the first
1,500 miles/2414 km of driving this vehicle. Parts have
a break-in period and performance will be better in the
long run.
For the first 200 miles/322 km:
The immobilizer system can learn new or replacement
keyless access transmitters. Up to four keyless
access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access
• To break in new tires, drive at moderate speeds and
avoid hard cornering for the first 200 miles/322 km.
• New brake linings also need a break- in period. Avoid
making hard stops during the first 200 miles/322 km.
This is recommended every time brake linings are
replaced.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the first 500 miles/805 km:
Front Air Dam
• Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
• Do not exceed 4,000 engine rpm.
The vehicle is equipped with a front air dam which has
minimal ground clearance.
• Avoid driving at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, including the use of cruise control.
Vehicles with the ZR-1 package also come with a splitter
made from carbon fiber.
• Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle
when the engine speed will exceed 4000 RPM.
{ CAUTION:
• Do not let the engine labor. Never lug the
engine in high gear at low speeds. With a manual
transmission, shift to the next lower gear. This rule
applies at all times, not just during the break-in
period.
The splitter in the ZR-1 is made from carbon fiber.
When damaged, the exposed edges can be very
sharp. A person could be injured by these sharp
edges. Use caution when washing the vehicle,
coming in contact with, or removing damaged
carbon fiber parts. See your dealer/retailer for
replacement.
For the first 1,500 miles/2414 km:
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first
1,500 miles/2414 km.
• Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
than normal during the first 1,500 miles/2414 km.
Under normal operation, these components will
occasionally contact some road surfaces (speed bumps,
driveway ramps, etc.). This can be heard inside the
vehicle as a scraping noise. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem.
Use care when approaching bumps or objects on road
surfaces and avoid them when possible.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Acc. (OFF/ACCESSORY): When the engine is
on or the vehicle is in accessory power mode, it is
recommended that a manual transmission be placed
in R (Reverse). An automatic transmission must be
placed in P (Park). Then press the Acc. button to turn the
engine off and place the vehicle in RAP. See “Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)” later for more information. If an
automatic vehicle is not correctly placed in P (Park) a
SHIFT TO PARK message will display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Ignition Positions
The vehicle has an
electronic keyless ignition
with a pushbutton start.
For more information, see DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.
When the engine is off, press this button to place the
vehicle in accessory mode. ACCESSORY MODE ON will
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This mode
allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield
wipers while the engine is off. Use accessory mode if you
must have the vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for
example, if the vehicle is being pushed or towed.
In order to shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be
running or in Acc. mode and the regular brake pedal
must be applied.
/ (START): Press this button while your foot is on the
brake for an automatic transmission, or while pressing
in the clutch for a manual transmission, to start the
engine. If the vehicle is in OFF or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) mode, the keyless access transmitter must
be inside the vehicle to start the engine.
After being in accessory mode for about 10 minutes, the
vehicle will automatically enter RAP or OFF, depending
on if the doors are opened or closed.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell phone chargers can interfere with the operation of
the Keyless Access System. Battery chargers should
not be plugged in when starting or turning off the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
To start the vehicle, do the following:
• Audio System
1. For vehicles with an automatic transmission, with
your foot on the brake pedal, press the START
button located on the instrument panel. For vehicles
with a manual transmission, you must also press in
the clutch pedal while pressing the START button.
• Power Windows
These features continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the engine is turned off or until either door is opened.
If a door is opened, the power windows and audio
system will shut off.
If there is not a keyless access transmitter in the
vehicle or if there is something causing interference
with it, the DIC will display NO FOBS DETECTED.
for more information.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for an
automatic transmission. For a manual transmission the
vehicle can be started in Neutral or any other gear as
long as the clutch pedal is pressed. To restart a vehicle
with a manual transmission when you are already
moving, use the Neutral position only. To restart a vehicle
with an automatic transmission when you are already
moving, use N (Neutral).
2. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the
button and the engine cranks automatically until
it starts. If the battery in the keyless access
transmitter is weak, the DIC displays FOB
BATTERY LOW. You can still drive the vehicle.
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
If the fob battery is dead, you need to insert the
fob into the fob slot to enable engine starting.
See “No Fobs Detected” under DIC Warnings
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
3. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
The keyless access transmitter must be inside the
vehicle for the ignition to work.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If the engine does not start and no DIC message is
displayed, wait 15 seconds before trying again to let
the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with
the electronics in the vehicle. If electrical parts or
accessories are added, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
while cranking for up to 15 seconds maximum. Wait
at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts,
let go of the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine.
Stopping the Engine
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, move
the shift lever to P (Park) and press and hold the Acc.
(Off/Accessory) button, located on the instrument panel,
until the engine shuts off. If the shift lever is not in
P (Park), the engine shuts off and the vehicle goes
into the Accessory Mode. The DIC displays SHIFT TO
PARK. Once the shifter is moved to P (Park), the vehicle
turns off. If the vehicle has a manual transmission,
it is recommended that you move the shift lever to
R (Reverse) and set the parking brake after you turn off
the engine by pressing the Acc. (Off/Accessory) button.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by pressing the START button immediately
after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at
least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine and
protects components. Once cranking has been initiated,
the engine continues cranking for a few seconds or until
the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start, cranking
automatically stops after 15 seconds to prevent cranking
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is already running.
If the keyless access transmitter is not detected inside
the vehicle when it is turned to off, the DIC displays
NO FOB – OFF OR RUN?.
more information.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Be sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting
the engine.
The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the brakes and
then press the shift lever button before you can shift
from P (Park) when the vehicle is running. If you cannot
shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever
and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move the shift lever into another gear.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provide
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
on page 4-22.
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. If the
page 4-28.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
S (Sport Mode): When in S (Sport Mode), the
transmission will work as an automatic until you use
the Manual Paddle Shift Controls, which activates driver
manual gear selection. See Manual Paddle Shift later in
this section. While in S (Sport Mode), the transmission’s
computer determines when the vehicle is being driven
in a competitive manner and will select and hold the
transmission in lower gears and have more noticeable
upshifts for sportier vehicle performance.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the system, shift from P (Park) position to S (Sport
Mode) while stopped and with the engine running, or from
D (Drive) with the vehicle moving. When accelerating the
vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, you may
want to shift to 2 (Second) or 3 (Third) gear. A higher
gear allows you to gain more traction on slippery
surfaces. If traction control is active, upshifts are delayed
to increase your control of the vehicle. See Traction
Manual Paddle Shift
While in the S (Sport Mode) position, the paddles
located on the steering wheel can be used to manually
up-shift or down-shift the transmission.
While the Manual Paddle Shift gear selection system is
active, the transmission will automatically downshift
through the gears as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will select 2 (Second) gear as the vehicle stops. From a
stop, the vehicle will start from and hold 2 (Second) gear
unless the driver manually paddle shifts into a different
gear or selects D (Drive). The driver can select 1 (First)
gear for maximum acceleration from a stop.
When using the Manual
Paddle Shift feature while
in S (Sport Mode), the
current gear will be
displayed in the Driver
Information (DIC), or the
Head-Up Display (HUD), if
the vehicle has either of
these features.
While in S (Sport Mode), push the paddle above the
steering wheel spokes to up-shift to the next gear, or pull
on the paddle behind the steering wheel spokes to
down-shift to the next gear.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a Navigation system, see “Head-Up
Display (HUD)” in the Index of the navigation manual.
The vehicle speeds required for Manual Paddle Shift
up-shifts depend on several vehicle inputs, which
will vary the allowed up-shift speed by a few mph (km/h).
The Manual Paddle Shift system will not allow either an
up-shift or a down-shift if the vehicle speed is too fast
or too slow, nor will it allow a start from 4 (Fourth) or
higher gear.
• Up-shifts to 4 (Fourth) gear require approximately
22 mph (35 km/h).
• Up-shifts to 5 (Fifth) gear require approximately
28 mph (45 km/h).
If up-shifting does not occur when needed, vehicle
speed will be limited to protect the engine.
• Up-shifts to 6 (Sixth) gear require approximately
41 mph (65 km/h).
The transmission will also automatically down-shift as
the vehicle slows down and comes to a stop.
To prevent damage to the powertrain, Manual Paddle
downshifts to a lower gear cannot be done above certain
speeds. The maximum speed allowed for downshifting
of gears 1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) are:
When the transmission gear does not respond to a shift
change, the DIC will show an X over the gear display.
When a requested shift is
denied due to the speed
restrictions shown, the DIC
will momentarily show
an X over the gear display
and a chime will sound.
• Into 4 (Fourth) gear over 168 mph (270 km/h)
• Into 3 (Third) gear over 124 mph (200 km/h)
• Into 2 (Second) gear over 81 mph (130 km/h)
• Into 1 (First) gear over 45 mph (72 km/h).
If the driver does not request an upshift as the engine
speed approaches fuel shut off RPM, the engine
speed will be limited to protect the engine. See
If the vehicle has a HUD, and the transmission gear does
not respond to a shift change, a chime will sound and the
HUD will momentarily show an X over the gear display.
Manual Paddle Shift operation is available for use with
for more information.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is the shift pattern for
the six-speed manual
transmission.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth): Shift into
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the same
way you do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle the
engine. The shift lever is in Neutral when it is centered
in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
Here is how to operate the transmission:
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal
and shift into R (Reverse). Just apply pressure to get the
lever past 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) into R (Reverse). Let up
on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator
pedal.
You can shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
40 mph (64 km/h). If you come to a complete stop and it
is hard to shift into 1 (First), put the shift lever in Neutral
and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back
down. Then shift into 1 (First).
The six-speed manual transmission has a feature that
allows you to safely shift into R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is rolling at less than 3 mph (5 km/h). You will be
locked out if you try to shift into R (Reverse) while the
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine speed drops below 900 rpm, or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift two
or more gears to keep the engine running smoothly or
for good engine performance.
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
{ CAUTION:
Notice: When shifting gears, do not move the shift
lever around unnecessarily. This may damage
the transmission. Shift directly into the next gear.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you downshift.
One to Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
This chart shows when to shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth)
instead of 1 (First) to
2 (Second).
Manual Transmission Recommended
Shift Speeds in mph (km/h)
Acceleration Shift Speed
1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Engine
All
15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (64) 45 (72) 50 (80)
Engines
page 3-39 for more information.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward 4 (Fourth)
and 3 (Third). Make sure you move the lever into
2 (Second) or 5 (Fifth). If you let the shift lever move in
the direction of the pulling, you may end up shifting
from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) or from 6 (Sixth) to 3 (Third).
Downshifting (Manual Transmission)
Do not downshift into the gear shown below at a speed
greater than shown in the table:
1 (First)
2 (Second)
3 (Third)
50 mph (80 km/h)
74 mph (119 km/h)
101 mph (163 km/h)
130 mph (209 km/h)
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
center console.
4 (Fourth)
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the
engine when downshifting.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Then push the release button in as you move the
parking brake lever all the way down.
The six-speed transmission has a spring that centers
the shift lever near 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth). This spring
helps you know which gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting from 1 (First) to
2 (Second) or downshifting from 6 (Sixth) to 5 (Fifth).
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission)
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is
firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into P (Park), hold down the regular brake
pedal. See if you can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pushing the button on the lever.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked into P (Park).
1. Hold the brake pedal set the parking brake.
information.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the lever and pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Press the Acc. button (ignition switch) to turn the
engine off.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Shifting Out of Park
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift the
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the
driver seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)”
listed previously in this section.
Shift lock release prevents shifting out of P (Park)
unless the vehicle is running or in Accessory mode and
the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
more information.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
2. Press the shift lever button.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the transmission parking pawl, so you can
pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Parking Over Things That Burn
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
{ CAUTION:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
Parking the Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
Before you get out of the vehicle, move the shift lever
into R (Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into R (Reverse)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the ignition
off and release the clutch.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an
enclosed area such as a garage or a building that
has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
the engine is running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
on page 2-33.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Map Lamps
Mirrors
If the mirror has map lamps, they are located at the
bottom of the mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or
off, press the button next to each lamp.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror with a compass display and/or
Cleaning the Mirror
map lamps, and OnStar®. If the vehicle has OnStar,
there are three control buttons located at the bottom of
more information on the services OnStar® provides.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Compass
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Compass Operation
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you. A time delay feature
prevents rapid changing from the day to night positions
while driving under lights and through traffic.
With the compass feature on, each time the vehicle is
started, the compass will take a few seconds to adjust
and display the current compass heading. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is activated
when the vehicle is started. Press and hold this button
for up to six seconds to turn this feature on or off.
T (Indicator Light): This light turns on when the
automatic dimming feature is active.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
Compass Calibration
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
Press P once to turn the compass display on or off.
If after several seconds the display does not show a
compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Interference can be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder or similar
object. If the letter C or CAL appears in the compass
window, the compass needs calibration.
Depending on the mirror, in order to calibrate, CAL must
be displayed in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is not
displayed, press P for several seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
If the compass has map lamps, it can be placed in
calibration mode by pressing and holding the left map
light button until a C appears on the compass display.
The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
2. Press and hold P until a Z and a zone number
The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance
needs to be changed to the appropriate zone.
displays. The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Once the zone number displays, press P
repeatedly until you reach the correct zone number.
Stop pressing P and the mirror returns to normal
operation.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
return it to the original position.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle has this feature, the driver side outside
mirror adjusts for the glare of headlamps behind you.
This feature is controlled by the on and off setting on the
inside rearview mirror.
Outside Convex Mirror
Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on
the driver door.
To adjust the mirrors:
{ CAUTION:
1. Move the top selector control to the left or right to
select either the driver or passenger mirror.
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad
to move the mirror in the desired direction.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
Keep the control in the center position when not
adjusting either outside mirror.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
If the vehicle has the memory feature, a preferred mirror
position can be stored. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
most vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service,
with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press
the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact
Roadside Service.
Outside Heated Mirrors
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
OnStar® System
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the
keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock
the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including
30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling that uses minutes to access location-based
weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press
the phone button and give a few simple voice commands
to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only
available in the continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or
at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in
a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless
phone network congestion.
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press
the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the
light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all services have been
deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the
OnStar equipment is active.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is KOBGTV06A.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A-GTV06A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
On vehicles with this feature there are three round Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal
Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
information.
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Programming can only occur when the vehicle is
running or in accessory mode.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
2. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold the
Universal Home Remote button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door moves.
The indicator light, above the selected button, should
slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up
to 20 seconds.
5. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
blinks rapidly until programming is complete.
6. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-6, choosing
a different function button in Step 4 than what was
used for the garage door opener.
3. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Press START or put the vehicle in accessory mode.
information.
2. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of dip
switches similar to the graphic above, the garage
door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not
see a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Programming can only occur when the vehicle is
running or in accessory mode.
The hand held transmitter can have between
eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand
of transmitter.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 3 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 5. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 3, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 5.
4. From inside the vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
5. The indicator lights blink slowly. Enter each switch
setting from Step 3 into the vehicle’s Universal Home
Remote. You have two and one-half minutes to
complete Step 5. Now press one button on the
Universal Home Remote for each switch setting
as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights turn on.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light comes on while
the signal is being transmitted.
7. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 55 seconds.
Operation can occur:
• If the vehicle is in accessory mode.
• If the vehicle is in running.
8. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light blinks rapidly until
programming is complete.
• If the vehicle is in Retained Accessory Mode (RAP).
for more information.
9. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
• Up to an additional 10 minutes after RAP finishes.
• Up to 10 minutes after any door is opened.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-9, choosing
a different button in Step 7 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Storage Areas
Glove Box
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Use the
key to lock and unlock the lighted glove box.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above the
buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
Cupholders
Two cupholders are located on the center console next
to the shift lever. Slide the handle from the left to the
right side to access the lid.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons are erased.
Center Console Storage
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
To use this storage area, pull the cover up on the driver
side front edge of the console and swing it to the
passenger side.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Mats
Rear Storage Area
Two rear storage compartments are located in the floor
of the rear hatch/trunk area.
The floor mats are designed to remain in position and
out of reach of the accelerator pedal. The driver side
floor mat is held in place by two locator pins and the
passenger side is held in place by one.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator pedal.
To remove a floor mat, pull
up on the rear of the mat
to disconnect it from the
locator pins.
Convertible shown, Coupe similar
To access a storage compartment, pull up to open the
cover. The covers cannot be removed.
For Z06 models, the right rear compartment stores the
battery and cannot be used for storage.
For ZR1 models, do not use the right and left rear
compartments as storage.
To reinstall the floor mats, position the openings in the
floor mat over the locator pins and push it down into
place.
Notice: Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the
rear storage compartments located in the hatch/trunk
area. The objects could damage the underbody.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Trunk Partition
For vehicles with the power convertible top option only,
there is a trunk partition to keep cargo from getting in the
way of the convertible top. The trunk partition must be in
place for the convertible top to move. If the trunk partition
is not properly in place the ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
Driver Information Center (DIC) message displays. See
information.
The trunk partition is a flat carpeted board with a
horizontal flap that can be attached to the top of the
trunk to divide the storage compartment or it stores flat
when not in use.
Pull the divider up and snap it onto the snaps on both
sides of the trunk.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Cargo Cover
Convenience Net
1. Hook the elastic loops
on the front corners (A)
of the shade to the
T-nuts located on the
front corners of the rear
hatch frame.
Use the convenience net, located in the rear, to store
small loads as far forward as possible. The net
should not be used to store heavy loads.
Cargo Cover
For vehicles with this feature, the security shade can
provide hidden storage in the rear area of the vehicle.
The shade is also helpful in blocking the glare from
the removable roof when it is stored in the rear
compartment.
2. Hook the elastic loops on the rear corners (B) of the
shade to the hooks recessed inside the rear hatch
frame, near the rear corners.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the loop to the top
of the striker (base
plate).
3. Grasp the loop at the rear center of the shade and
wrap it around the striker assembly.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
Roof Panel
On vehicles with a removable roof panel, follow the
procedures when removing or installing it.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into P (Park). Shift
a manual transmission into N (Neutral).
Removing the Roof Panel
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Lower both sun visors.
{ CAUTION:
4. Open the rear hatch and remove any items that
may interfere with proper storage of the roof
panel.
Do not try to remove a roof panel while the vehicle
is moving. Trying to remove the roof panel while
the vehicle is moving could cause an accident.
The panel could fall into the vehicle and cause
you to lose control, or it could fly off and strike
another vehicle. You or others could be injured.
Remove the roof panel only when the vehicle is
parked.
5. Lower the windows.
There are two release latches on the front of the
roof panel and one rear release latch on the back of
the roof panel.
Until you are sure you can remove the panel alone,
have someone help you.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The driver’s side handle moves toward the driver’s
door. The passenger’s side handle moves toward
the passenger’s door.
6. To unlock the release latches on the front of the
roof panel, grasp each handle and pull it outward.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. To unlock the rear of
the roof panel’s rear
release latch, press the
back of the release
handle (B). Then press
the button on the
8. Stand on one side of the vehicle, and if necessary,
have someone stand on the other side. Together,
carefully lift the front edge of the roof panel up
and forward.
9. When the roof panel is loosened from the vehicle,
one person should grasp the roof panel as close to
the center as possible and lift it away from the
vehicle.
front of the release
handle (A).
Pull down the latch lever.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Insert the roof panel so
that the outside front
edges line up between
the receiver covers.
Storing the Roof Panel
{ CAUTION:
Push forward on the
roof panel until it stops.
If a roof panel is not stored properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Whenever you store a roof panel in the vehicle,
always be sure that it is stored securely in the
proper location.
3. Gently place the roof
panel down so that the
back pins on the roof
panel drop into the
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
receivers in the back of
the storage area.
1. Turn the roof panel so that the front edge of the
panel is facing the storage area.
Press down firmly to seat the pins in the receivers.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To remove the roof panel from the rear storage
area of the vehicle, pull up on the rear edge and
remove it from the storage area.
Installing the Roof Panel
4. Carefully place the roof panel over the top of the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
5. Position the rear edge of the roof panel to the
weatherstrip on the back of the roof opening.
Then align and fit the pins at the rear of the roof
panel inside the openings in the rear overhead
weatherstrip. Gently lower the front edge of the
roof panel to the front of the roof opening.
An improperly attached roof panel may fall into or
fly off the vehicle. You or others could be injured.
After installing the roof panel, always check that it
is firmly attached by pushing up on the underside
of the panel. Check now and then to be sure the
roof panel is firmly in place.
6. Turn the front release
handles inward so that
they latch to the
Notice: If you drop or rest a roof panel on its
edges, the roof panel, paint and/or weatherstripping
may be damaged. Always place the roof panel in
the stowage receivers after removing it from
the vehicle.
closed position.
In most cases, it makes it easier if two people install the
roof panel.
1. Park on a level surface and set the parking brake.
Shift an automatic transmission into P (Park).
Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral).
7. Push up on the handle of the rear roof release
handle to latch its hook in the closed position.
8. Push and pull the roof panel up and down and
side-to-side to ensure the roof panel is securely
installed.
2. Check that the front release latches and the rear
release latch on the vehicle’s roof opening are in
their opened positions before attempting to
install the roof panel.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parts of the manual convertible top that are used
when lowering and raising it are:
Convertible Top
Convertible Top (Manual)
For care and cleaning of the convertible top, see
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
If the vehicle has this feature, the following
procedures explain the proper operation of the
manual convertible top.
A. Front Edge of the Convertible Top
B. Rear Edge of the Convertible Top
C. Tonneau Cover
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
the convertible top.
Lowering the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it.
2. Make sure the ignition is off.
3. Make sure the trunk is closed.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage
top components. Do not lower the top in cold
weather.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
4. The convertible top front latch, located above the
inside rearview mirror, must be unlocked. Pull the
convertible top front latch down and turn it clockwise
to unlock it.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Lift upward on the front edge (A) of the convertible
top off of the windshield frame. Then lift upward on
the rear edge (B) of the convertible top so it is
vertical to the tonneau cover (C). The front edge (A)
and rear edge (B) should be straight up.
6. Tilt the driver’s seatback forward and press the
tonneau cover release button located on the
underside of the tonneau cover (C) behind the
driver’s seat. Then raise the tonneau cover (C).
If the tonneau cover does not release and
three chimes are heard, check to make sure the
trunk lid is closed. Also, the cover will not release
if the vehicle alarm is armed.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s
and passenger’s door glass should retract to the
full-down position.
If the vehicle has lost battery power, the tonneau
cover (C) can still be opened using the manual
release cable.
The tonneau cover emergency manual release
cable is located underneath the carpeting behind the
passenger’s seat head restraint, on the underside
forward edge of the tonneau cover. To access
the cable, lift and pull back the carpeting. Also,
the emergency trunk release handle.
Notice: If you lower the convertible top into the
storage compartment and the rear edge of the top
is not in the full-down position, you could damage
the top. Always verify that the rear edge of the
convertible top is in the full-down position before
lowering the top into the storage compartment.
7. Pull the cable to release the tonneau cover.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Push forward on the front edge (A) of the
convertible top to allow the rear edge (B) of the
convertible top to be moved to its full-down position.
9. Then move the top rearward to its fully-stored
position.
10. After the top is stored, apply one even push on the
center of the front edge (A) of the convertible top to
assure that the top is fully retracted.
11. Close the tonneau cover (B) by pressing down on it
with a swift, firm motion.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raising the Manual Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Shift an automatic
transmission into P (Park) and set the parking
brake. Shift a manual transmission into N (Neutral)
and set the parking brake.
2. Lower both windows.
3. Make sure the ignition is off.
4. Tilt the driver’s seat forward and press the tonneau
cover release button, or use the manual release
cable if battery power has been lost. See Step 6
under “Lowering the Manual Convertible Top” earlier
in this section.
After pressing the release button, the driver’s
and passenger’s door glass should retract to
the full-down position, if they have not already
been lowered.
6. Pull the convertible top up by firmly gripping the
front edge (A) near the center and applying a
brisk upward and forward motion to get the top in
the full-up position.
5. Lift the tonneau cover.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Push the front edge (A) of the convertible top down
from the outside of the vehicle, or pull the front
edge (A) of the convertible top down from the center
pull-down handle located in the inside of the vehicle.
7. Lift the rear edge (B) of the convertible top to its
full-up position by first raising the front edge (A).
8. Close the tonneau cover (C) by pushing it down
with a swift, firm motion.
11. Pull the top front latch handle down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
9. Lower the rear edge (B) of the convertible top by
first slightly pushing the front edge (A) of the
convertible top forward.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you lower the top on your vehicle in cold
weather (0°F/-18°C or lower), you may damage top
components. Do not lower the top in cold weather.
Convertible Top (Power)
For care and cleaning of the convertible top see
Appearance Care”. High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
To operate the power convertible top use the following
steps.
Notice: Leaving the convertible top down and
exposing the interior of your vehicle to outdoor
conditions may cause damage. Always close
the convertible top if leaving your vehicle outdoors.
Lowering the Power Convertible Top
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an
automatic transmission into P (Park) and set the
parking brake. Shift a manual transmission
into N (Neutral), and set the parking brake.
Notice: Lowering the convertible top when there
are objects in the storage area could damage
it or break the glass rear window. Always verify that
no objects are in the storage area before lowering
the convertible top.
2. Make sure the trunk is closed and the rear trunk
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
upright position, and that no objects are forward
of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, or dirty
can cause stains, mildew, and damage to the inside
of your vehicle. Dry off the top before lowering it.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push and hold the
bottom of the power
convertible top button,
located to the left of the
steering wheel, on the
instrument panel.
The windows will automatically lower and the convertible
top will lower into the rear of the vehicle. A chime will
sound when the convertible top has lowered completely.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief time
due to a new audio system equalization being loaded.
3. Release the convertible top front latch, located
above the inside rearview mirror, by pulling and
turning it clockwise toward the driver’s door. Push
upward on the front edge. The windows will
automatically lower.
If the convertible top is operated multiple times, the
engine should be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power convertible top. See DIC Warnings
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Make sure the trunk lid is closed and the rear trunk
partition in the rear storage area is in the fastened
upright position, and that no objects are forward
of the divider. See “Rear Trunk Partition” under
Raising the Power Convertible Top
Notice: If you raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is in motion, you could damage the
top or the top mechanism. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always put an
automatic transmission in (P) Park or a manual
transmission in (N) Neutral before raising or
lowering the convertible top.
3. Push and hold the top of the power convertible top
button. The top will raise and the windows will lower
if they were in the raised position. A chime will
sound when the top is raised completely.
1. Park on a level surface. Start the engine. Shift an
automatic transmission into P (Park) and set the
parking brake. Shift a manual transmission
into N (Neutral) and set the parking brake.
4. After the convertible top is completely raised,
release the power convertible top button.
5. Pull the convertible front top latch down and turn it
counterclockwise to lock the convertible top.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
completely stowed, with the top down and the tonneau
latched, or closed, with the front top latch locked in place,
at the time the convertible top button was released.
If the radio is on the sound may be muted for a brief
time due to a new audio system equalization being
loaded.
1. Open the tonneau cover by pulling the emergency
release cable.
If the vehicle has lost power, the convertible top can still
be raised by releasing pressure on the hydraulic pump,
located under the passenger’s side of the tonneau cover,
by using the following steps. The carpet liner on the
passenger’s side must be pulled back to access the
hydraulic pump.
The tonneau cover emergency release cable is
located behind the passenger’s seat head restraint,
on the underside forward edge of the tonneau
on the emergency trunk release handle.
Be careful when opening the tonneau cover by hand.
If the tonneau cover is opened quickly, damage can
occur to the hinging mechanism, which can prevent
proper operation of the convertible top.
Manual operation of the power convertible top cannot
be attempted for five minutes from the last time the
convertible top button was pressed if the top is not
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When power is restored to the vehicle, the hydraulic bolt
must be tightened, by turning it clockwise. The power
convertible top button can then be used to lower or raise
the convertible top.
If the power convertible top is operated multiple times,
the engine should be running to prevent drain on the
vehicle’s battery. Under certain conditions, the Driver
Information Center (DIC) may display a message
regarding the power top. See DIC Warnings and
If the battery has been disconnected, the power
windows must be initialized for the power top to operate.
2. Locate the pressure release bolt on the front side of
the hydraulic pump.
3. Use the wrench, located in the console, and turn
the pressure release bolt counterclockwise one
revolution, to relieve pressure to the hydraulic
pump. This will allow you to manually raise the
convertible top.
4. Then follow the steps under raising the manual
convertible top. See “Convertible Top (Manual)”
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-108
(If Equipped).
R. Telescopic Wheel Button (If Equipped).
page 3-25.
page 5-8. Hatch/Trunk Release Button. See “Hatch/
N. Power Folding Top Switch (If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers warns others that you have
a problem. The button is located near the center of
the instrument panel.
| : Press to make the front and rear turn signal lamps
flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what mode
the ignition is in, even if the ignition is turned off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telescopic Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
If your vehicle has this feature, the telescopic steering
column will allow you to adjust the distance the steering
wheel is from the instrument panel.
The telescopic steering
column switch is located on
the right side of the steering
column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
# : Fog Lamps
To operate the telescopic steering column, push the
switch forward and the wheel will move away from you.
Pull the switch rearward and the wheel will move
toward you
I : Cruise Control
The telescopic steering column position can be stored
with your memory settings. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
P : Exterior Lamps Control
page 3-8.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal on Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
(Auto Signal)
A chime sounds if the turn signal has been on for more
than three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km) of driving.
An arrow on the instrument
If you need to leave the turn signal on for more than
three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and
then turn it back on.
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high,
push the turn signal lever all the way forward. To change
from high to low beam, pull the lever rearward.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal
a turn.
While the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be lit.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Release the lever and the
turn signal automatically flashes three times. If more
flashes are desired, continue to hold the lever.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrows flash
rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Flash-to-Pass
To use the flash-to-pass feature, briefly pull the turn
signal lever toward you. The high-beam indicator flashes
to indicate to the other driver that you intend to pass.
If the low-beam headlamps are off and the fog lamps
are on, the fog lamps flash.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-103.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x (Delay Adjustment): Use for a delayed wiping
cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longer
delay or up for a shorter delay. The wiper speed can only
be manually adjusted when the lever is in this position.
Windshield Wipers
9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move all the way down to mist and release
for a single wiping cycle. The windshield wipers will
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer for
more wipes.
The windshield wiper lever is located on the right side of
the steering column.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. If this
occurs, a circuit breaker will stop the wipers until the
motor cools. Clear all ice and snow from the windshield
wiper blades before using them. If the wiper blades
are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen them
or warm the windshield before turning the wipers on.
If they become worn or damaged, get new blades
or blade inserts.
Move the lever to the following positions:
1 (High Speed): For steady wiping at high speed.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
& (Delay): Use to set a delay between wipes.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
The lever on the right side of the steering column also
controls the windshield washer. There is a button at the
end of the lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield,
press the button and hold it. The washer will spray until
you release the button. The wipers will continue to clear
the window for about six seconds after the button is
released and then stop or return to your preset speed.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the
cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
If the fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
the message CHECK WASHER FLUID will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. It will take
15 seconds after the bottle is refilled for this message to
turn off. For information on the correct washer fluid to
If the vehicle is in cruise control, and has the Traction
Control System (TCS), and it begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control automatically disengages. See Traction
conditions allow the cruise control to be safely
used again, it can be turned back on.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has cruise
control.
Setting Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into
cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
9 (Off): Turns the system off.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
R (On): Turns the system on.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use to make the vehicle
accelerate or resume a previously set speed.
3. Press T at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever to
When the cruise control is engaged, the CRUISE SET
TO XX MPH message displays on the Driver Information
set the speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
But it does not need to be reset.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch briefly
from R to S .
The vehicles goes back up to your chosen speed and
stays there.
speed. Press J at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle now cruises at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it there
until desired speed is reached, and then release
the switch. To increase the vehicle speed in small
If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle
keeps going faster until the switch is released or the
brake is applied. Do not hold the switch at resume/
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
amounts, move the switch briefly to S . Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until the lower speed
desired is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, briefly press J .
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Cruise Control in Sport and Manual Paddle
Shift Gear Selection
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed set
earlier.
When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and the manual paddle
shift controls are not being used, cruise control
operates in the same manner as D (Drive).
When the vehicle is in S (Sport) and the manual paddle
shift controls are being used, cruise control operates
as follows:
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. When the brakes
are applied the cruise control turns off.
• If cruise control is active and a gear is selected with
the manual paddle shift controls, the vehicle speed
is maintained in the driver selected gear and will not
automatically up-shift or down-shift the transmission
while the driver’s gear selection is active.
• If driving in hilly terrain, cruise control may not
be able to maintain vehicle speed if an up-shift
or down-shift is not selected by the driver. While
driving on hilly terrain and cruise control is active
with a manual paddle shift gear selection, the driver
must select the proper gear for the terrain or select
D (Drive) on the gear range selector for full automatic
transmission operation.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ending Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
To end a cruise control session, step lightly on the
brake pedal. If the vehicle has a manual transmission,
lightly tapping the clutch will also end a cruise control
session.
Move the cruise control switch to 9 to turn the system
completely off.
When cruise control is disengaged, the CRUISE
DISENGAGED message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the
steering wheel on the multifunction lever.
Erasing Speed Memory
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp band has four positions:
O (Off): Turns off all lamps.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Sets the exterior lamps to
automatic mode. AUTO mode turns the exterior lamps
on and off depending on how much light is available
outside the vehicle.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately 15 seconds and deactivates and returns to
ambient lighting conditions 15 seconds after the wipers
are turned off.
To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.
To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exterior
lamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic mode also
resets when the vehicle is turned off and then back
on again if the control is left in the AUTO position.
If the exterior lamp control has been turned off or is
in the parking lamp position while the wiper control is
active in any position, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
; (Parking Lamp): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
Headlamps on Reminder
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
The parking brake indicator light comes on and stays
on when the parking lamps are on with the engine
off and the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the
instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
Make sure the instrument panel brightness knob is in the
page 3-19 for more information.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system makes the front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
If it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamp control
is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will
display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC).
• It is still daylight and the ignition is on.
• The exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off a second
time, or turning on the headlamps will remove the
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message in the DIC.
If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned on
instead, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
will continue to be displayed.
• The transmission is not in P (Park) or the parking
brake is off.
• The parking brake is off or the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will
be on. The parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel
lights, or other exterior lamps will not be on when the
DRL are being used.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
To turn off the DRL, turn the exterior lamp control to
the off position or shift into P (Park). The DRL will stay off
until the control is toggled again or the vehicle is shifted
out of P (Park).
When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps turn off and the normal low-beam headlamps
turn on.
When it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps
go off, and the front turn signal lamps will take over.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Twilight Sentinel®
Twilight Sentinel® can turn the lamps on and off for you.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the Twilight Sentinel® work, so be sure it is not covered.
Use fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions.
The fog lamps control is located on the multifunction
lever next to the exterior lamp control.
With Twilight Sentinel®, the following will happen:
• When it is dark enough outside, the front turn signal
lamps (DRL) will go off, and the headlamps and
parking lamps will come on. The other lamps that
come on with headlamps will also come on.
# (Fog Lamps): Turning the band to this position will
turn the fog lamps on.
When you turn the fog lamps on, the fog lamp light will
appear on the instrument panel cluster to indicate that the
fog lamps and the parking lamps are on.
• When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off, and the front turn signal lamps (DRL) will
come on, as long as the exterior lamp switch is in the
AUTO position.
If you turn the high-beam headlamps on, the fog lamps
will turn off. They will turn on again when you switch
to low-beam headlamps.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system come on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute
for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL
if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in full bright
The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can idle the vehicle with the lamps off, even when
it is dark outside.
If you turn off the ignition with the exterior lamp switch
in the parking lamp or headlamp position, the Twilight
Sentinel® delay will not occur. The lamps will turn off
as soon as the switch is turned off.
After starting the vehicle, turn the exterior lamp
control band on the multifunction lever to off and then
release it. The lamps will remain off until the control
band is turned to off again.
The regular headlamp system should be turned on
when needed.
Twilight Sentinel® also provides exterior illumination as
you leave the vehicle. If Twilight Sentinel® has turned
on the lamps when you turn off the ignition, the
lamps will remain on until:
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been
left on, the exterior lamps will turn off as soon as the
ignition is turned off or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. This protects against draining the battery
in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or
parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work
if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch
is turned to off.
• The exterior lamp switch is moved from off to the
parking lamp position, or
• A delay time that you select has elapsed.
See “Personal Options” under DIC Vehicle
that you want. You can also select no delay time.
If you need to leave the lamps on, use the exterior lamp
control to turn the lamps back on.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Entry/Exit Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
entering the vehicle. The interior lamps will come on
for about 20 seconds when the engine is off.
The knob for this feature is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
You can turn exit and entry lighting off by quickly turning
the courtesy lamps on and off.
Reading Lamps
The inside rearview mirror includes two reading lamps.
The lamps will go on when a door is opened. When the
doors are closed, press each lamp switch to turn them
on individually.
Push the knob in to turn on the interior lights.
Turn and hold the knob clockwise to brighten the lights
or counterclockwise to dim them. During the day, this
knob will adjust the instrument panel brightness and
at night will adjust all interior lighting.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Be sure not to have this knob turned all the way
down with the lamps on during the day. Your Driver
Information Center (DIC) may not be visible.
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the battery
from being drained in case any of the following lamps
are left on; the underhood lamp, if your vehicle has this
feature, vanity mirror lamps, cargo lamps, reading lamps,
console or glove box lamps. If any of these lamps
are left on, they will automatically time-out after about
10 minutes. To reset it, all of the above lamps must
be turned off or the ignition key on.
Courtesy Lamps
When any door or the hatch/trunk lid is opened, the
interior lamps will go on unless it is bright outside.
You can also turn the courtesy lamps on and off
by pressing the instrument panel brightness knob.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Shift Light
Head-Up Display (HUD)
This light is used for performance driving to indicate
that the vehicle’s best performance level has been
reached to shift the transmission into the next higher
gear. An arrow pointing up will light up on the display
just prior to reaching the engine fuel cut-off mode.
This cut-off is about 6,500 RPM for the LS3 engine,
6,600 RPM for the LS9 & ZR1 engines and
{ CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your
field of view, it may take you more time to see
things you need to see when it is dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed
low in your field of view.
7,000 RPM for the LS7 engine.
• Check Gages Warning
• Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
For vehicles with the Head-Up Display (HUD), you can
see some of the driver information that appears on
the instrument panel cluster.
• Transmission Fluid Temperature Gage, (Automatic
Transmission Vehicles Only)
• Engine Oil Temperature Gage
• Engine Oil Pressure Gage
• G-Force Gage
The information may be displayed in English or metric
units and appears as an image focused out toward
the front of the vehicle. The HUD consists of the
following information:
• Boost Gage (If Equipped)
• Audio Functions, Street Mode Only
• Speedometer
• Turn Signal Indicators
• High-Beam Indicator Symbol
• Tachometer
• Navigation, Only with Navigation Radio,
Turn-by-Turn Guidance
• Manual Paddle Shift Gear Indicator (If Equipped)
These displays on the HUD are for use when
using the manual paddle shift controls to shift the
transmission. See “Manual Paddle Shift” in Automatic
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are three HUD modes that can be viewed in
the HUD display. Press the MODE button to scroll
through these modes in the following order:
When the desired HUD display has been selected,
release the MODE button.
Within each mode, the display, can be further
customized by pressing the PAGE button. Pressing this
button in each mode will turn off and on the following:
Street Mode supports
audio and navigation
functions with your choice
of tachometer settings.
• Street Mode — No tachometer, circular tachometer,
and linear tachometer.
• Track Modes 1 and 2 — No minor gage, coolant
temperature, transmission oil temperature, engine oil
temperature, engine oil pressure, and boost gage.
While in Track Mode 1 or 2, the maximum G value
achieved during the current ignition cycle can be
displayed by pressing and holding the PAGE button.
The maximum G display will be shown until the PAGE
button is released. The maximum G value display will
be identical to the normal G value display, except the
maximum G gage digits (X.XX G) and corresponding
G gage bar will overwrite the current G value.
Track Mode 1 supports the
G-Force gage and minor
gages with a circular
tachometer.
Track Mode 2 supports
G-Force gages, boost
gage w/ZR1, and minor
gages with a linear
tachometer.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The HUD controls are
located to the left of the
steering wheel.
Be sure to continue scanning the displays, controls
and driving environment just as you would in a vehicle
without HUD. If you never look at the instrument panel
cluster, you may miss something important, such as a
warning light. Under important warning conditions, the
CHECK GAGES warning will illuminate in the HUD.
View your Driver Information Center (DIC) for more
information.
To adjust the HUD so it can be seen properly, do the
following:
1. Start the engine and press the HUD dimmer control
all the way up by pressing the (+) button.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined
by the light conditions in the direction the vehicle is
facing and where you have the HUD dimmer control
set. If you are facing a dark object or a heavily
shaded area, the HUD may anticipate that you
are entering a dark area and may begin to dim.
It is possible for sunlight to enter the HUD making
it difficult to see the image. The display will return
to normal when the sunlight is no longer entering
the HUD.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable driving position.
If your seat position changes, the HUD may need
to be re-adjusted.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove
any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity
of the HUD image.
3. Press the up or down arrows to center the HUD
image in your view.
To clean the HUD, spray household glass cleaner on a
soft, clean cloth. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry
it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because
the cleaner could leak into the unit.
The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down,
not side-to-side.
If the ignition is on and the HUD image cannot be seen,
check to see if:
4. Press the dimmer control downward until the HUD
image is no brighter than necessary.
• Something is covering the HUD unit.
To turn HUD off, press and hold the (–) button until the
HUD display turns off.
• The HUD dimmer control is adjusted properly.
• The HUD image is adjusted to the proper height.
If the sun comes out or it becomes cloudy, the HUD
brightness may need to be adjusted again using
the dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses could
make the HUD image harder to see.
• Ambient light is low, in the direction the vehicle
is facing.
page 5-103.
The HUD information can be displayed in one of
six languages including English, Spanish, French,
German, Italian or Japanese. The speedometer can
be displayed in either English or Metric units.
Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD
To change the language and unit selections, see
page 3-50.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating
of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlet can be used to connect
electrical equipment, such as a cellular phone.
The accessory power outlet is located inside the center
console storage compartment, on the forward left side.
To use the outlet, remove the tethered cap. When not
using it, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in
for an extended period of time while the vehicle is
off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied
to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment
that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
We recommend that you see a qualified technician or
your dealer/retailer for the proper installation of your
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
accessory power outlets.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
The ashtray and cigarette lighter are located on the
instrument panel, in front of the shift lever. To use the
ashtray, press on the indentation at the top of the door.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation
can be controlled.
Loose objects, such as paper clips, can lodge behind
and beneath the ashtray lid and prevent movement
of the lid. You should avoid putting small, loose objects
near the ashtray.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
A. Driver Temperature
Controls
B. Display
F. Air Conditioning
G. Fan Control
H. Air Delivery Mode
Control
C. Passenger
Temperature Control I. Defrost
D. AUTO J. Rear Window
E. Recirculation Defogger
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle is first started, the display shows the
driver’s temperature setting, the outside temperature,
the fan speed and the air delivery, for about 10 seconds.
The AUTO control system works best with the windows
up and the removable roof installed or the convertible
top up.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The outside temperature is shown in the center of
the display. The digital display will show the readings
in Fahrenheit or Celsius. See “Personal Options”
for information on changing your display.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 60°F (16°C) and 90°F (32°C). Choosing
the coldest or warmest temperature setting will
not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
A setting of 73°F (23°C) is suggested.
Automatic Operation
In cold weather, the system will start at reduced
fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle
until warmer air is available. The system starts out
blowing air at the floor but may change modes
automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain
the chosen temperature setting. The length of time
needed for warm up depends on the outside
temperature and the length of time that has
elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button to place
the entire system in the automatic mode. When automatic
operation is active, the system automatically controls the
inside temperature, the air delivery mode, and the fan
speed.
After a ten second display of the current settings,
the word AUTO, the driver’s temperature setting and
the outside temperature will be shown. The system
operates to reach the set temperature as quickly
as possible.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of
the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensor” later in
this section.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press this button to
manually lock in the current air delivery setting and to
stop the automatic mode control. Pressing N deletes
AUTO from the digital display and the mode graphics
will be shown. To change the setting, press N again.
The AUTO button must be pressed to return to the
automatic mode selection.
Driver Power/Temperature: Press the driver
temperature knob to turn the climate control system off.
This is the only setting that completely shuts off the fan.
The digital display shows only the outside temperature.
The driver and the passenger set temperature and the
air intake mode can still be adjusted when the climate
control is off.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Passenger Power/Temperature: Press the passenger
temperature knob to turn the passenger’s climate control
system on or off. Turn the knob to increase or decrease
the temperature for the passenger. If the passenger’s
climate control system is off, the driver’s temperature
knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets, with some air directed to the floor outlets.
% (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and side window
defogger outlets.
x 9 w (Fan): Press to increase or decrease the fan
speed. The fan speed setting will appear in the display.
Pressing the arrows will delete AUTO from the digital
display. The fan graphics with the fan speed bars will be
shown. The AUTO button must be pressed to return to
the automatic fan control.
- (Floor/Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and the floor
outlets, with a small amount to the side window outlets.
In this mode, the system automatically turns off the
recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the
highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter
may need to be replaced. For more information, see
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
1 (Defrost): This mode clears the windows of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with a small amount directed to the side window outlets.
The indicator light comes on and the digital display will
show the defrost mode symbol and fan speed when
the front defrost mode is being used. In this mode, the
system automatically turns off the recirculation and runs
the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
be selected while in the defrost mode. Pressing 1 again
For quick cool down on hot days press the AUTO button
and adjust the temperature to a cool, comfortable setting.
To achieve maximum cool down, do the following:
will return the system to the last operating mode.
For severe ice conditions, turn the driver’s temperature
knob to 90°F (32°C) while in defrost mode.
1. Select H mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
2. Press ? .
^ (Air Conditioning Off): Press to turn the air
conditioning compressor off. Press AUTO to return to
automatic operation. When in AUTO, the air conditioning
compressor comes on automatically, as needed.
3. Select the a/c on.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
the vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
Air conditioning does not operate at temperatures
below about 35°F to 40°F (2°C to 4°C). In temperatures
above 40°F (4°C), the air conditioning cannot be
turned off in defrost and defog, as it helps to remove
moisture from the vehicle. It also helps to keep the
windows clear.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so a small amount of water might drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also a sensor located behind the front bumper.
This sensor reads the outside air temperature and
helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle.
Any cover on the front of the vehicle could give a
false reading in the temperature.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that recirculation is on. This mode prevents outside air
from entering your vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle and
to help cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Recirculation mode is not available in defrost or
defog mode.
If the outside temperature goes up, the displayed
temperature will not change until:
• The vehicle’s speed is above 12 mph (19 km/h) for
five minutes.
Sensors
• The vehicle’s speed is above 32 mph (52 km/h) for
two and a half minutes.
The solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar
heat and uses the information to maintain the selected
temperature when operating in AUTO mode by
automatically adjusting the temperature, fan speed
and air delivery system. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be activated, as
necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located
on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield
or the system will not work properly.
These delays prevent false readings. If the temperature
goes down, the outside temperature will be shown
when you start the vehicle. If it has been turned off for
less than three hours, the temperature will be recalled
from the previous vehicle operation.
There is also an inside temperature sensor located to
the left of the ignition switch. The automatic climate
control system uses this sensor to receive information,
so if you block or cover it, the system will not function
properly.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar to the defogger grid.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
The rear window defogger only works when the engine
is running.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much
snow from the rear window as possible. An indicator light
comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the tab located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
The rear window defogger turns off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed when traveling less than
30 mph (48 km/h). If turned on again, the defogger
only runs for about five minutes before turning off.
The defogger can also be turned off by turning off
the engine.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors.
The mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirrors when the rear window defogger
button is pressed.
• Keep the area around the base of the instrument
panel console and air path under the seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside of
your vehicle more effectively.
For vehicles with a power convertible top, the rear
window defogger and heated mirrors are automatically
disabled when the power convertible top is moving
or down.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To check or replace the air filter:
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The passenger compartment air filter removes certain
particles from the air including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more often in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter may need to be
for information on how often to replace the filter.
Notice: Driving without a passenger compartment
air filter in place can cause water and small particles,
like paper and leaves, to be pulled into your climate
control system which may cause damage to it. Make
sure you always replace the old filter with a new one.
1. Remove the cover retainer clips (A) from the
passenger compartment air filter cover.
The passenger compartment air filter is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment near
the battery. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14.
2. Remove the cover.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
3. Remove the filter and install the new air filter.
4. Replace the filter cover.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
5. Attach the retainer clips.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster and Driver Information Center (DIC) are designed to show how the vehicle is running.
It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel the vehicle has left and many other things needed
to know to drive safely and economically.
United States Manual Transmission shown, Canada, Automatic Transmission and Z06 Model similar
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ZR1– United States shown Canada similar
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the speed in either miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). For more
information see “Personal Options” under DIC Vehicle
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime comes on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
To read the odometer with the ignition off, turn on the
parking lamps.
The safety belt light also
comes on and stay on for
several seconds, then
If the vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the
mileage total of the new odometer will be set to the
original miles (kilometers) of the old odometer. See your
dealer/retailer if the odometer must be replaced in the
vehicle.
it flashes for several more.
Tachometer
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Notice: Fuel shuts off at about 6500 rpm for the
base model, 7000 rpm for the Z06 model, and
6600 rpm for the ZR1 model. If the vehicle continues
to be driven at the fuel shut off rpm, the engine
could be damaged. Be sure to operate the vehicle
below the fuel shut off rpm or reduce the vehicle’s
rpm quickly when the fuel shuts off.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{ CAUTION:
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have
the vehicle serviced right away.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
immediately.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status indicator will light either
ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, to let you know
the status to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The rearview mirror
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
page 1-51 for more on this, including important safety
information.
United States
Canada
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Voltmeter Gage
The voltmeter shows the
voltage output of the
battery. It shows the
voltage output of the
charging system while
the engine is running.
{ CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
Base and Z06
The reading changes as the rate of charge changes
(with engine speed, for example), but if the voltmeter
reads at 9 volts or below, the instrument panel cluster
and other systems may shut down. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) reads BATTERY VOLTAGE
LOW when the vehicle is at 10 volts or below. Have it
checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter reading
at 10 volts or below could drain the battery and disable
the vehicle.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After shifting to 4 (Fourth), the vehicle can be
downshifted to a lower gear.
One-to-Four Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
Notice: Forcing the shift lever into any gear except
4 (Fourth) when the 1 TO 4 SHIFT light comes on
may damage the transmission. Shift only from
1 (First) to 4 (Fourth) when the light comes on.
When this light comes on,
the vehicle can only be
shifted from 1 (First)
to 4 (Fourth) instead of
1 (First) to 2 (Second).
This light comes on when:
• The engine coolant temperature is higher than
169°F (76°C),
• The vehicle is going 15 to 19 mph
(24 to 31 km/h) and
The shift must be completed into 4 (Fourth) to turn off
this feature. This helps the vehicle get the best possible
fuel economy.
• The vehicle 21 percent throttle or less.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake System Warning Light
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working well.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If this warning light stays on after the engine is started,
the parking brake may still be set or there could be
to see if it is set. If the parking brake is not set, have
the brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not come on, have it fixed so it is ready to warn
if there is a problem.
If the light comes on while driving and a CHECK BRAKE
FLUID message shows on the DIC, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push or the
pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to
stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for
information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
The Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning
light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
page 3-40.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light stays on, or comes on while driving and a
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message displays in
the Driver Information Center (DIC), the vehicle needs
service.
This light comes on when the TCS is turned off and a
TRACTION SYSTEM OFF message displays on the DIC.
When this light is on, the TCS system does not limit
wheel spin.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light turns off when the TCS is turned back on
and a TRACTION SYSTEM ON message displays
on the DIC
If the light stays on or comes on while driving, a chime
sounds and a SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
message appears on the DIC and the vehicle need
service.
information.
The system is not working properly and the vehicle
needs service.
This light also comes on while the vehicle is in the
Competitive Mode. See Active Handling System
on page 4-7.
This light also comes on when the Competitive Drive
mode is selected.
When the Active Handling System is turned off, the light
comes on, a chime sounds, and the TRACTION SYSTEM
AND ACTIVE HANDLING – OFF message displays in the
DIC. The Traction Control System is off and the Active
Handling System does not assist with controlling the
vehicle.
Active Handling System Light
The Active Handling
System light comes on
briefly as the engine is
started. If the light does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If the system is working
normally the light goes off.
When the Active Handling System is turned back on,
the light turns off, a chime sounds and the TRACTION
SYSTEM AND ACTIVE HANDLING – ON message
displays in the DIC.
more information.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
United States
Canada
When the Light is On Steady
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine
is too hot.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as
it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate
for more information.
This means that the engine coolant has overheated.
If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving
conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible.
information.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original
tires with other than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s
emission controls and can cause this light to come
on. Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
This comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling
on acceleration. These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might
have developed.
for five seconds. The instrument panel, including the
check engine light, will light up and the ignition will be
on, but the engine will not start — press the bottom of
the Acc. button only briefly, less than five seconds,
the accessory power mode will be turned on, but not
the ignition. After the bulb check, press and release
the Acc. button again to turn the ignition off and avoid
draining the vehicle’s battery.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been replaced or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving. If this has been done
and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running.
To perform a check engine light bulb check with the
keyless ignition, make sure the transmitter fob is in
the passenger compartment. See Ignition Positions
on page 2-23. Press the bottom of the Acc. button
on the instrument panel and hold the button down
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
United States
Canada
The engine oil pressure gage shows the engine
oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals) when the engine is running.
Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to 550 kPa).
In certain situations such as long, extended idles on hot
days, it could read as low as 6 psi (40 kPa) and still
be considered normal. It may vary with engine speed,
outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings
above the shaded area show the normal operating range.
Readings in the shaded area tell you that the engine is
low on oil, or that you might have some other oil problem.
United States — Z06
and ZR1 Models
Canada — Z06 and
ZR1 Models
The engine oil pressure can also be displayed using the
GAGES button on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-18.
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
information.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
for more information.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are five things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows how
much fuel the vehicle has
left while the engine is on.
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads the full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated half full, but it took a little more or less
than half of the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering, braking
or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate the tank is empty when
the ignition is turned off.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
• The gage reading may change slightly within the first
several minutes after starting the vehicle.
When the needle approaches the low fuel symbol, a
chime sounds and LOW FUEL appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display. There is still a little
fuel left, but the vehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon.
information.
Press the RESET button to acknowledge a DIC
message(s). Pressing the RESET button also turns off
a DIC message but the LOW FUEL message comes
on again in 10 minutes if fuel is not added to the vehicle.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Boost Gage (ZR1 Only)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster and shows driver
personalization features and warning/status messages.
The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel,
to the right of the cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is turned on.
After displaying CORVETTE BY CHEVROLET, the DIC
shows the information that was last displayed before
the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the DIC display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information.
United States
Canada
For vehicles that have this gage, it is located near the
driver side of the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
Depending on the features on the vehicle, the drive
gear may display on the DIC. See “Manual Paddle Shift”
and “Head-Up Display (HUD)” in the index of the
Navigation system manual for more information.
It displays the air pressure level in the intake manifold
before it enters the engine’s combustion chamber.
The gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the engine is started. Actual vacuum or boost is displayed
from this zero point. Changes in ambient pressure,
such as driving in mountains and changing weather,
will slightly change the zero reading.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different modes
which can be accessed by pressing the following buttons
located on the instrument panel, to the right of the
instrument panel cluster.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Gages): Press this button to display gage
information like oil pressure and temperature, coolant
temperature, automatic transmission fluid temperature,
if equipped, battery voltage, and front/rear tire pressures.
TRIP: Press this button to display your total and trip
distance driven, the elapsed time function, your average
speed, and the engine oil life.
OPTION: Press this button to choose personal options
that are available on your vehicle, depending on the
options your vehicle is equipped with, such as door
locks, easy entry seats, and language.
RESET: Press this button, used along with the other
buttons, to reset system functions, select personal
options, and turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
. 4 (Fuel): Press this button to display fuel information
such as fuel economy and range.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range: The range calculates the remaining
distance you can drive without refueling. It is based
on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in the tank.
FUEL Button
The fuel button displays average fuel economy and
instantaneous fuel economy, calculated for your specific
driving conditions, and range information.
Press the fuel button again to display the range,
such as:
Average Fuel Economy: The average fuel economy
is viewed as a long-term approximation of your overall
driving conditions. You should reset the average fuel
economy display every time you refuel. If you press the
RESET button in this mode while you are driving, the
system will reset this display and begin figuring fuel
economy from that point in time.
• RANGE 30 MI or
• RANGE 48 km
If the LOW FUEL warning is displayed or if RANGE
is less than 40 miles (64 km), the display will read
RANGE LOW.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your driving
conditions change, this data is gradually updated
automatically.
Press the fuel button to display average fuel economy,
such as:
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
If the vehicle has been idling for a long time, the
range displayed on the DIC could be abnormally low.
The vehicle must be driven 5–10 miles (8–16 km) to get
an accurate reading.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Instantaneous fuel
economy reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle
has right now and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. Unlike average fuel economy,
this menu item cannot be reset.
Press the fuel button again to display instantaneous fuel
economy, such as:
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 20.1 MPG or
• INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY 11.7 L/100 km
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coolant Temperature: This display shows the engine
coolant temperature.
GAGES Button
The gages button displays oil pressure, oil temperature,
coolant temperature, transmission fluid temperature
for automatic transmission vehicles only, battery voltage,
and tire pressure information.
Press the gages button again to display the coolant
temperature, such as:
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 123°F or
• COOLANT TEMPERATURE 51°C
Oil Pressure: This display shows the oil pressure.
If the coolant temperature is low, the display will
show COOLANT TEMPERATURE LOW. If the coolant
temperature is high, the display will show COOLANT
TEMPERATURE HIGH.
Press the gages button to display the oil pressure,
such as:
• OIL PRESSURE 40 PSI or
• OIL PRESSURE 276 kPa
Transmission Fluid Temperature: If you have an
automatic transmission vehicle, this display shows the
automatic transmission fluid temperature.
Oil Temperature: This display shows the oil
temperature.
Press the gages button again to display the automatic
transmission fluid temperature, such as:
Press the gages button again to display the oil
temperature, such as:
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 123°F or
• TRANS FLUID TEMP 51°C
• OIL TEMPERATURE 234°F or
• OIL TEMPERATURE 112°C
If the transmission fluid temperature is low, the display
will show TRANS FLUID TEMP LOW. If the transmission
fluid temperature is high, the display will show TRANS
FLUID TEMP HIGH.
If the oil temperature is low, the display will show OIL
TEMPERATURE LOW. If the oil temperature is high,
the display will show OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Voltage: This display shows the current battery
voltage.
TRIP Button
The TRIP button displays the odometer, trip distance,
elapsed time, average speed, and oil life remaining
information.
Press the gages button again to display the battery
voltage, such as:
• BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.5 VOLTS
Odometer: The odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven in either miles or kilometers. Press
the TRIP button to display odometer readings, such as:
Tire Pressure: This display shows the tire pressure for
each tire.
• ODOMETER 12345 MI or
• ODOMETER 20008 km
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure
for the front tires, such as:
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or
• FRONT TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa
You can also display the odometer by turning on the
parking lamps.
Press the gages button again to display the tire pressure
for the rear tires, such as:
Trip Odometers: There are two trip odometers.
Press the TRIP button to display TRIP ODOMETER A
readings and press the button again to display
TRIP ODOMETER B readings, such as:
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 34 PSI R 33 PSI or
• REAR TIRE PRESSURES L 234 kPa R 228 kPa
• TRIP ODOMETER A 130.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER A 209.9 km
• TRIP ODOMETER B 300.5 MI or
• TRIP ODOMETER B 483.5 km
Both of the trip odometers can be used simultaneously.
The trip odometers can be reset by pressing the
RESET button on the DIC.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also a miles since last ignition feature that
displays the number of miles (kilometers) driven since
you last started the vehicle. Press and hold the RESET
button for three seconds, then release it. The miles
(kilometers) since the last ignition cycle will be set
into the trip odometer.
Average Speed: Press the TRIP button until the
average speed is displayed, such as:
• AVERAGE SPEED 62 MPH or
• AVERAGE SPEED 100 km/h
Press and hold the RESET button to reset to
0.0 mph (km/h).
Elapsed Timer: Press the TRIP button until ELAPSED
TIMER is displayed, such as ELAPSED TIMER .00.
Engine Oil Life: Press the TRIP button until the engine
When the ignition is in on, the DIC can be used
as a stopwatch. The display can show hours, minutes
and seconds. The elapsed time indicator will record
up to 23 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, then it
will reset to zero and continue counting. The display
appears as ELAPSED TIMER .00 in the elapsed
time function.
oil life is displayed, such as OIL LIFE REMAINING 89%.
This is an estimate of the engine oil’s remaining
useful life. It will show 100% when the system is reset
after an oil change. It will alert you to change the oil
on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the system will
alert you with the message CHANGE ENGINE OIL.
You can start or stop the elapsed time by pressing
the RESET button. To reset the elapsed time to zero,
press the RESET button for three seconds while
the timer is displayed.
Remember, you must reset the engine oil life system
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
To reset the system, see Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-26. Be careful not to reset the engine oil life
system accidentally at any time other than when the
oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately
until the next oil change.
Pressing and holding the RESET button for at least
10 seconds will reset the timer display to the time
since last ignition cycle.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some messages may not require immediate action,
but you can press the RESET button to acknowledge
that you received the messages and to clear them from
the display.
OPTION Button
The OPTION button allows you to access the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and customize the
personalization settings on your vehicle. See DIC
information.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display seriously and
remember that clearing the messages will only make
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
RESET Button
The RESET button, used along with other buttons, will
reset system functions and turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ACTIVE
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the Antilock Brake
System (ABS) is adjusting brake pressure to help
avoid a braking skid.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. You can scroll through the messages that may
have been sent at the same time. The DIC is continuously
updated with the vehicle performance status.
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message
is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The message stays on for a few seconds after the
system stops adjusting brake pressure. See Antilock
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACTIVE HANDLING
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the Active Handling
System is operating. The Active Handling System
is a computer controlled system that assists the driver
in controlling the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
You may feel or hear the system working and see the
ACTIVE HANDLING message displayed in the DIC.
This message stays on for a few seconds following the
active handling event. This is normal when the system is
This message displays when the vehicle has detected
that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
point. The battery saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that features are disabled, this message is
displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the
charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories
to allow the battery to recharge.
BUCKLE PASSENGER
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
safety belt.
ACTIVE HANDLING READY
This message displays when the functional check
of the Active Handling System has been completed.
information.
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
ATTACH TRUNK PARTITION
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message will not come on.
If the vehicle has a power convertible top, this message
displays and a sound will be heard if the trunk partition
is not in place. Open the hatch/trunk and make sure
the trunk partition is secure and no objects are on the
for more information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
This message displays when the life of the engine oil
After an oil change, the engine oil life system must be
reset. See “Engine Oil Life” under DIC Operation and
for more information.
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your safety belt.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will
be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message will not come on.
CHECK BRAKE FLUID
This message displays, a sound will be heard, and
the brake system warning light on the instrument panel
cluster turns on if the ignition is on to inform the driver that
the brake fluid level is low. See Brake System Warning
page 5-43.
This message is an additional reminder to the safety
belt reminder light in the instrument panel cluster.
information.
CHANGE BRAKE PADS
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL
On vehicles with electronic brake pad wear sensors,
this message will be displayed when the pads are worn.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
This message displays when the engine coolant level
is low. Have the cooling system serviced by your dealer/
page 5-34.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK GAS CAP
CLOSE TRUNK TO MOVE TOP
This message displays if the fuel cap has not been fully
tightened. Check the fuel cap to make sure that it is on
properly. Once tightened, it takes at least one overnight
park to reset or clear this message. If both the CHECK
GAS CAP message and the malfunction indicator lamp in
the instrument panel cluster are on, you may need to see
your dealer/retailer for service. See Malfunction Indicator
This message displays and a sound will be heard
if the trunk is open while you are trying to operate the
convertible top. Make sure the trunk is closed before
operating the convertible top. See Convertible Top
on page 2-69.
COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the Competitive Driving mode is selected. The instrument
panel cluster light will be on when the Competitive Driving
mode is selected. The Traction Control System (TCS) will
not be operating while in the Competitive Driving mode.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See Racing or Other
CHECK OIL LEVEL
On some vehicles, this message displays and two
chimes sound if the oil level in the vehicle is low.
Once the vehicle senses a change in the engine
oil level, the light remains off.
If this message appears after starting the engine, the
engine oil level may be too low. You may need to
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE
ENGINE DRAG CONTROL ACTIVE
This message displays when engine drag control is
active. When driving in a lower gear in rainy, snowy,
or icy conditions and then letting up on the accelerator
or downshifting, the rear wheels may begin to slip
and this message displays. This message stays on
for a few seconds following the engine drag control event.
This message displays and a sound will be heard if the
engine coolant exceeds 255°F (124°C). If you have been
operating the vehicle under normal driving conditions, pull
off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
You can monitor the coolant temperature with the gages
button on the DIC or the engine coolant temperature
gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine
on page 3-43.
ENGINE OVERHEATED – STOP
ENGINE
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the engine
off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message and sound will come back on until this
condition changes. If you do not press the RESET button,
the message remains on until the condition changes.
ENGINE PROTECTION REDUCE
ENGINE RPM
CRUISE DISENGAGED
This message displays if the engine oil temperature
exceeds 320°F (160°C). Check the engine coolant
temperature and engine oil level. If the engine is too
may need service, so see your dealer/retailer.
This message displays briefly when you disengage the
cruise control system by stepping on the brake on an
automatic transmission vehicle or the clutch on a manual
transmission vehicle, or by turning off the cruise control
information.
You can monitor the oil temperature with the gages
button on the DIC. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50.
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
This message remains displayed and active until the
issue is resolved.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
HOT ENGINE AIR CONDITIONING OFF
This message displays if it is dark enough outside and
the headlamps and the Twilight Sentinel® controls are
off. This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended. It has become dark
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C
operation automatically resumes. You can continue to
drive the vehicle. If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible to avoid compressor damage.
HIGH TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays when one or more of the tires is
over-inflated. This message also displays LEFT FRONT,
RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to
indicate which tire is affected. You can receive more
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read other
messages that may have been sent at the same time,
press the RESET button. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have
the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on
the Tire Loading Information label. See Run-Flat Tires
tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-50.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
LOW FUEL
This message displays when the fuel tank is less than
10 percent full and the display is turned off. A sound will
be heard when this message is displayed. Refill the
page 3-49.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays when one or more of the
tires is under-inflated. This message also displays
LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or
RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire is affected. Multiple
chimes sound and the tire pressure light on the
instrument panel cluster turns on when this message
You can receive more than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
LOW OIL PRESSURE
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
If this message appears while the engine is running,
stop the engine and do not operate it until the cause
of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the
engine can result. A sound will be heard when this
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
{ CAUTION:
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will
be reduced during severe maneuvers. The active
handling system will be affected. See Active
fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or
TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drive cautiously
and check your tire pressures as soon as you can.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations have
EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless
access transmitter.
MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h)
This message displays when a malfunction is present in
the Selective Ride Control system. The vehicle speed
will be limited to a value determined by the vehicle when
the shock absorber system has failed and the shocks
are in their full soft mode. Have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
NO FOBS DETECTED
This message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a keyless access transmitter when you have
attempted to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just
closed. The following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
If moving the transmitter to different locations within
the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
glove box transmitter pocket with the buttons facing to
the right and then press the START button.
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the
keyless access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?
PRESS BRAKE TO START ENGINE
(Automatic Transmission Only)
This message displays when the keyless access
transmitter is not detected inside the vehicle while you
are trying to turn the ignition off. The vehicle may be
near a strong radio antenna signal causing the keyless
access system to be jammed. The vehicle will remain in
ACCESSORY until the vehicle is turned off or is restarted,
or five minutes has expired. If you turn the ignition off and
you cannot find the keyless access transmitter, you will
not be able to restart the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter needs to be inside of the vehicle in order for
for more information.
This message displays if you try to start the engine by
pressing the keyless ignition start button without having
the brake pressed. The brake needs to be pressed when
for more information.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
If this message displays and the check engine light
comes on, a noticeable reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur. If the REDUCED ENGINE
POWER message is displayed, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven.
OPTIONS UNAVAILABLE
This message displays for a few seconds if a keyless
access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2 is used
and you try to personalize the features on the vehicle
by pressing the OPTION button. The personalization
system will not recognize the transmitter and the DIC
will not display the current driver number or the menus
used to set personalizations. The personalization
features will then be set to the default states. See DIC
information.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime the
check engine light stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer as soon as possible for diagnosis
for more information.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every five minutes until this
condition changes.
If this message displays while you are driving, stop as
soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the message stays
on, or comes back on again while you are driving, the
vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.
If the antilock brake system (ABS) warning light is on
and the regular brake system warning light is not on,
you still have brakes, but do not have ABS. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you do not have
ABS and there is a problem with the brakes. See Antilock
If the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is
displayed in combination with the COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE message, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-39.
SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Active Handling System and the vehicle needs service.
The active handling system light on the instrument panel
cluster also turns on and a sound will be heard. See your
dealer/retailer. When this message is displayed, the
system is not working. Adjust your driving accordingly.
information.
If this message is displayed, the Traction Control
System (TCS) and the Active Handling System will
also be disabled. The DIC will scroll three messages:
SERVICE ANTILOCK BRAKES, SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM, and SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING, and the
instrument panel cluster lights will come on along with
a sound. When the service message is displayed, the
computer controlled systems will not assist the driver.
Have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE AIR CONDITIONING
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are no
longer working. Have the climate control system serviced
by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and
air conditioning efficiency.
To acknowledge these messages, press the RESET
button.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If this message displays while you are driving, there
may be a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could mean that there is a loose or broken drive belt
or that there is another electrical problem. Have the
vehicle checked right away by your dealer/retailer.
Driving while this message is on could drain the battery.
This message displays when the Selective Ride Control
system has detected a malfunction and the system must
be serviced. See your dealer/retailer. If a fault is present
in the Selective Ride Control system which causes the
shocks to be in their full soft condition, the messages
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE,
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 km/h) will display
more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the message
on, be certain to turn off the vehicle’s accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
Multiple chimes sound when this message is displayed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET
button. The message reappears every 10 minutes
until this condition changes.
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-43. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-75 for more information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
This message displays if an electrical problem has
occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM
This message displays if the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel system.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message also displays when the cluster is
not getting fuel information from the PCM.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
SET PARK BRAKE FOR SEAT RECALL
If this message displays when you are driving, there is
a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS) and
the vehicle is in need of service. See your dealer/retailer.
When this message is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
displays if you try to recall the memory positions
when the ignition is on and the parking brake is not set.
If the vehicle is on, you must set the parking brake in
order for the memory positions to recall. See Memory
information.
The traction control system (TCS) warning light on
the instrument panel cluster will also turn on and
a sound will be heard.
SET PARK BRAKE TO MOVE TOP
When this message is displayed, the computer
controlled systems will not assist the driver in
controlling the vehicle. Have the system repaired
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 for more information.
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, this message
displays and a sound will be heard if you try to operate
the power convertible top without first setting the parking
brake. Set the parking brake before trying to operate the
more information.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
SHIFT TO PARK
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
message displays if the vehicle is not in P (Park) when
the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will be in
ACCESSORY Once the shift lever is moved to P (Park),
the vehicle will turn off.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
there may be an electrical or another system problem
with the vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer/retailer if this message keeps appearing.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle will remain in ACCESSORY, without the
20 minute time-out period, until the shift lever is moved
to P (Park) or until the driver presses the pushbutton
page 2-23 for more information.
TIRE FLAT
{ CAUTION:
SHIFT TO PARK OR SET PARK BRAKE
FOR TOP
When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or TIRE FLAT
message is displayed on the Driver Information
Center, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be
reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too
fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or
others could be injured. Do not drive over 55 mph
(90 km/h) when the LOW TIRE PRESSURE or
TIRE FLAT message is displayed. Drive cautiously
and check your tire pressures as soon as you can.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, this
message displays and a sound will be heard if you try
to operate the power convertible top without first shifting
into P (Park) or setting the parking brake. Either shift the
vehicle into P (Park) or set the parking brake before trying
to operate the power convertible top. See Convertible
on page 2-69 for more information.
SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
This message displays when one or more of the tires is
flat. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate
which tire is affected. Multiple chimes sound and the
tire pressure light on the instrument panel cluster comes
on when this message is displayed. See Tire Pressure
This message displays when a malfunction is present
in the Selective Ride Control system which is causing
the shocks to be in their full soft mode. This is a warning
to the driver that the vehicle handling may be affected.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message is followed by the MAXIMUM SPEED
55 MPH (90 km/h) message, and then by the REDUCED
HANDLING message. The Active Handling System
will intervene more quickly when a flat tire has been
detected. Adjust your driving accordingly.
TOP MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the power convertible top button is pressed and the
power convertible top pump motor temperature is over
221°F (105°C). Wait for the power convertible top
pump motor to cool down before using the power
convertible top.
You can receive more than one tire pressure message
at a time. To read other messages that may have been
sent at the same time, press the RESET button. If a tire
pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon
as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set
to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation
TOP NOT SECURE
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the power convertible top button is released before the
top open or close operation is complete or if the top is
closed without the header latch engaged. Press and hold
the convertible top button to fully open or close the top,
and make sure that the header latch is engaged after
the top is closed.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
A message reappears every 10 minutes until the
condition is corrected.
TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. The message stays on
for a few seconds after the TCS stops limiting wheel
for more information.
TOO COLD TO MOVE TOP
This message displays and a sound will be heard when
the power convertible top button is pressed and the
power convertible top pump motor temperature is below
-4°F (-20°C). Wait for the power convertible top pump
motor to warm up before using the power convertible top.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING – OFF
TRACTION SYSTEM – OFF
This message displays and stays on, a sound will be
heard, and the traction control system (TCS) warning light
on the instrument panel cluster turns on when the TCS
is turned off by pressing the Active Handling System
button on the console. See Traction Control System
This message displays, the instrument panel cluster
light turns on, and a sound will be heard when the
Traction Control System (TCS) and Active Handling
System are turned off by pressing the Active Handling
System button on the console for five seconds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) remains on with the
TCS and Active Handling System off. Adjust your driving
for more information.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET
button.
TRACTION SYSTEM – ON
To acknowledge this message, press the RESET
button.
This message displays and a sound will be heard
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned on
by pressing the Active Handling System button on the
console. This message automatically clears from the DIC
display on its own. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-6 for more information.
TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING – ON
If the Traction Control System (TCS) and Active
Handling System are off, this message displays briefly,
the instrument panel cluster light turns off, and a sound
will be heard when the TCS and Active Handling System
are turned on by briefly pressing the Active Handling
System button on the console. See Traction Control
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To acknowledge the message, press the RESET button.
The message reappears every 10 minutes until this
condition changes. If you do not press the RESET button,
the message remains on the display until the condition
changes.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays and four chimes sound if the
transmission fluid temperature rises above 270°F (132°C)
or rises rapidly. The transmission may shift gears or
apply the torque converter clutch to reduce the fluid
temperature. Driving aggressively or driving on long hills
can cause the transmission fluid temperature to be higher
than normal. If this message appears, you may continue
to drive at a slower speed. Monitor the transmission fluid
temperature and allow it to cool to at least 230°F (110°C).
The transmission fluid temperature can be monitored
with the gages button on the DIC. See DIC Operation
temperature. If it is also hot, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-39.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a sound will be heard if a
turn signal is left on for three-quarters of a mile (1.2 km).
Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
position.
To acknowledge this message, press the RESET
button.
UNLATCH HEADER TO MOVE TOP
This message displays and a sound will be heard if you
try to lower the convertible top without first unlocking
the top. Move the latch handle to unlock the convertible
If this message is displayed during normal vehicle
operation on flat roads, the vehicle may need service.
See your dealer/retailer for an inspection.
If driving in a performance or competitive manner,
the use of (S) Sport Automatic Mode or (S) Sport
Manual Paddle Shift gear selection is recommended.
for more information.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• INTRUSION SENSOR OFF, if your vehicle has this
feature
Other Messages
Here are more messages that you can receive on your
Driver Information Center (DIC). To acknowledge a
message and read another message that may have
come on at the same time, press the RESET button.
• INTRUSION SENSOR ON, if your vehicle has this
feature
• KNOWN FOB
• ACCESSORY MODE ON
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH
• MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOBS LEARNED
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW
• CHECK WASHER FLUID
• OFF–ACCESSORY TO LEARN
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (XXX km/h)
• DRIVER DOOR AJAR
• PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
• READY FOR FOB #X
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• FOB AUTOLEARN WAIT XX MINUTES
• TONNEAU AJAR (Convertible)
• TRUNK AJAR (Convertible)
• UPSHIFT NOW
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
• FOB BATTERY LOW
See “Battery Replacement” under Keyless Access
• HATCH AJAR (Coupe)
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The current driver’s preferences are recalled when one
of the following occurs:
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Many features on your vehicle can be personalized.
This means that the operation of these features can be
set to operate differently depending on who is driving
the vehicle. See “Personal Options” later in this section
for the features that you can personalize.
• The lock or unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter, labelled 1 or 2, is pressed.
• The appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located
on the driver’s door is pressed. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 1-4
for more information.
The personalization settings for other features are
automatically updated and saved as the driver adjusts
them. These include the following settings and presets:
• A valid keyless access transmitter is detected upon
opening the driver’s door.
• The radio presets, tone, volume, fade, balance,
equalization (EQ) settings and source (radio or CD)
If more than one valid keyless access transmitter is
detected upon opening the driver’s door, the driver
preferences for the lowest driver number will be recalled.
• The last climate control setting
• The Head-Up Display (HUD) position and dimming
level, if your vehicle has this feature
If a keyless access transmitter that is not labelled 1 or 2
is used, the personalization system will not recognize the
transmitter. The Driver Information Center (DIC) will not
display a current driver number and the features that are
normally programmed through the DIC will be set to the
default states. Also, if the OPTION button is pressed,
the DIC does not display the menus used to set
personalizations, but instead displays OPTIONS
UNAVAILABLE for a few seconds.
• The instrument panel cluster dimming level and last
selected DIC display
Separate personalization settings are saved for
two different drivers. One of the keyless access
transmitters is assigned to driver 1. The other is
assigned to driver 2. The back of the keyless access
transmitters are labelled 1 or 2 to correspond to each
driver.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Personal Options Menu
Personal Options
To enter the personal options menu, use the following
steps:
The following options are available for programming:
Display Units: This option allows you to choose
the measurement units.
1. If you have an automatic transmission vehicle, turn
the vehicle on with the shift lever in P (Park).
Press the OPTION button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
If you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn the
vehicle on with the parking brake set.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
• ENGLISH (default)
• METRIC
2. Press the OPTION button and you will enter the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu.
If you choose ENGLISH, all information will be displayed
in English units.
The DIC will display the current driver
number (1 or 2) for a few seconds and then will
display instructions on which buttons to use for
setting the personalizations. The RESET button
is used to select a setting for a particular feature.
The OPTION button is used to move to the next
feature.
If you choose METRIC, all information will be displayed
in metric units.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
3. Press the OPTION button while the instruction
screen is displayed to enter the first personalization
menu item.
Auto Memory Recall (Automatic Transmission only):
If your automatic transmission vehicle has the memory
package, you may have this option. This option allows
the driver’s seat, the telescopic steering column, if your
vehicle has this feature, and the outside rearview mirrors
to automatically move to the current driver’s set position
when the engine starts.
4. Once you have cycled through all of the personal
options, pressing the OPTION button a final time
exits the personal options menu. In addition, if no
button is pressed within 45 seconds, the DIC will
exit the personal options menu.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO MEMORY RECALL
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
In order for the Auto Exit Recall feature to work on
an automatic transmission vehicle, the vehicle must
be in P (Park). On a manual transmission vehicle,
the parking brake must be set.
• YES
Press the OPTION button until AUTO EXIT RECALL
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, the driver’s seat, the outside
rearview mirrors and the telescopic steering column,
if your vehicle has this feature, positions are recalled
when you turn the ignition on.
• YES
• NO (default)
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
If you choose YES, when you turn the ignition off and
open the driver’s door or press the unlock button on the
keyless access transmitter, the seat and the telescopic
steering wheel, if your vehicle has this feature, will return
to their stored exit positions for an easy exit or an easy
entrance when returning to the vehicle.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
Auto Exit Recall: If your vehicle has the memory
package, you may have this option. This option allows
the driver’s seat and telescopic steering column, if your
vehicle has this feature, to automatically move to the
current driver’s exit position when one of the following
occurs:
The seat and steering wheel will only return to the
stored driving position if you press the appropriate
memory button or activate the auto memory recall
feature.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
• The vehicle is turned off or in Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) or accessory mode and the driver’s
door is opened.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
• The vehicle is turned off or in RAP and the unlock
button on the keyless access transmitter is pressed.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approach Lights: This option briefly turns on the
parking lamps, the high-beam headlamps and the
back-up lamps during low light periods when the
keyless access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
Twilight Delay: This option allows you to set the
amount of time you want the parking lamps and
high-beam headlamps to remain on after you exit
the vehicle. This will occur when the vehicle is off or in
RAP and the headlamps are on due to the automatic
headlamp system. The parking lamps and high-beam
headlamps will remain on until the driver selected time
expires, the exterior lamp control is activated or the
vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until APPROACH LIGHTS
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• OFF
• ON (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose ON, the parking lamps, the high-beam
headlamps, and the back-up lamps will come on
for 20 seconds during low light periods when all
of the following occurs:
Press the OPTION button until TWILIGHT DELAY
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
• OFF
• You press the unlock button on the keyless access
transmitter.
• 15 S
• Both of the doors are closed.
• The vehicle is off or in RAP.
• 30 S (default)
• 90 S
The lamps remain on for 20 seconds or until a door is
opened, the lock button on the keyless access transmitter
is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off or in RAP.
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose 15 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
15 seconds.
information.
If you choose 30 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
30 seconds.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you choose 90 S, the twilight delay time will be set to
90 seconds.
Flash at Lock: This option activates the front and rear
turn signals for one long flash when the lock button on the
keyless access transmitter is pressed. This will only occur
when the vehicle is off. If the lock button on the keyless
access transmitter is pressed again within five seconds,
the horn will sound regardless of which setting you have
selected.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
Flash at Unlock: This option activates the front and
rear turn signals for two short flashes when the unlock
or hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter
is pressed. This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT LOCK appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until FLASH AT UNLOCK
appears on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• YES (default)
• NO
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals will
flash once when you press the lock button on the
keyless access transmitter.
• YES (default)
• NO
If you choose YES, the front and rear turn signals
will flash twice when you press the unlock button or the
hatch/trunk button on the keyless access transmitter.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FOB Reminder: This option sounds the horn three
times when the driver’s door is closed and there is a
keyless access transmitter inside the interior of the
vehicle. This will only occur when the vehicle is off.
For example, if there are two keyless access transmitters
in the vehicle and one is removed, the other will be locked
in. The keyless access transmitter locked in the vehicle
can still be used to start the vehicle or unlock the doors, if
needed. A person approaching the outside of the locked
vehicle without an authorized keyless access transmitter,
however, will not be able to open the door, even with a
transmitter in the vehicle.
Press the OPTION button until FOB REMINDER appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
• YES
You may temporarily disable the passive door locking
feature by pressing the door unlock switch for
three seconds on an open door. Passive door locking
will then remain disabled until a door lock switch is
pressed or until the power mode transitions from the
off power mode.
• NO (default)
If you choose YES, the horn will sound three times
when a keyless access transmitter is inside of the
vehicle while the ignition is turned off and the driver’s
door is closed.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR
LOCKING appears on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the following modes:
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to
the next personal option.
• OFF (default)
• SILENT
Passive Door Locking: This option allows you to
select whether the doors automatically lock during normal
vehicle exit. When the ignition is turned off and all doors
become closed, the vehicle will determine how many
keyless access transmitters remain in the vehicle interior.
If at least one keyless access transmitter has been
removed from the interior of the vehicle, the doors
will lock after a short delay.
• HORN
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose SILENT, the doors will automatically
lock a short time after you remove a keyless access
transmitter from the interior of the vehicle and close
both doors.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you choose HORN, the doors will automatically lock
and the horn will sound a short time after you remove
a keyless access transmitter from the interior of the
vehicle and close both doors.
If you choose BOTH, both doors will automatically
unlock when you approach and open the driver’s door
with the keyless access transmitter.
Auto Unlock: This option allows you to select whether
the driver’s door, both doors or neither door automatically
unlocks when the shift lever is moved into P (Park) for
automatic transmission vehicles or when the ignition is
turned off or is in RAP for manual transmission vehicles.
If you are parking in a quiet area and do not want the
horn to sound when the doors lock, press the lock button
on the keyless access transmitter immediately after
removing it from the interior and closing the doors.
This will lock the doors and cancel the passive locking
for this ignition cycle.
Press the OPTION button until AUTO UNLOCK appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to scroll
through the following modes:
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
• OFF
• DRIVER
Passive Door Unlock: This option allows you to select
which doors will automatically unlock when you approach
and open the driver’s door with the keyless access
information.
• BOTH (default)
If you choose OFF, this option will turn off.
If you choose DRIVER, on automatic transmission
vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P (Park). On manual
transmission vehicles, the driver’s door will automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
Press the OPTION button until PASSIVE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the display, then press the
RESET button to scroll through the following modes:
• DRIVER (default)
• BOTH
If you choose BOTH, on automatic transmission
vehicles, both doors will automatically unlock when
the shift lever is moved into P (Park). On manual
transmission vehicles, both doors will automatically
unlock when the ignition is turned off or is in RAP.
If you choose DRIVER, only the driver’s door will
automatically unlock when you approach and open
the driver’s door with the keyless access transmitter.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance
to the next personal option.
When the mode you want is selected, press the
OPTION button to set your choice and advance to the
next personal option.
Language: This option allows you to select the
language the DIC, the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your
vehicle has this feature, and the radio uses to display
messages. Each language mode will be displayed in its
own language. For example, English will be displayed as
ENGLISH, Spanish as ESPANOL, etc. If your vehicle has
the navigation system, you will not have the Japanese
language mode.
Personalize Name: This option allows you to type
in a name or greeting that will appear on the DIC
display whenever the corresponding keyless access
transmitter (1 or 2) is used or one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door is pressed.
Press the OPTION button until PERSONALIZE NAME
appears on the display, then press the RESET button
to scroll through the following modes:
Press the OPTION button until LANGUAGE appears
on the display, then press the RESET button to
scroll through the following modes:
• YES
• NO (default)
• ENGLISH (default)
• DEUTSCH (German)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ITALIANO (Italian)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
If you choose YES, you can type in a name that will
appear on the DIC display.
To program a name, use the following procedure:
1. Enter the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu and
select the driver number (1 or 2) that you would
like to program by following the instructions listed
previously under “Entering the Personal
Options Menu”.
If you choose a language that you do not understand,
press the OPTION and RESET buttons for five seconds.
The DIC will begin displaying all of the various languages
one by one for as long as the buttons are pressed. When
the desired language is displayed, release the buttons
and the DIC will set to this language.
2. Press the OPTION button until the PERSONALIZE
NAME option appears on the display.
3. Select YES under PERSONALIZE NAME by
pressing the RESET button.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the OPTION button and a cursor will display
where you can insert a letter.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the name or greeting
you want is complete. After the name or greeting
is complete, keep pressing the RESET button
until the display turns blank and exits out of this
option. You can program up to 20 characters.
5. Press the OPTION button again until the letter you
want is displayed. To scroll through the letters faster
and without a beeping noise, keep the OPTIONS
button depressed. There are alpha/numeric
characters and a blank space available.
If you choose NO, this option will turn off.
If a customized name or greeting is not programmed,
the DIC display will show Driver 1 or Driver 2 to
correspond with either the number on the back of the
keyless access transmitter (1 or 2) that is being used
or to the memory button (1 or 2) that is pressed.
6. Then press the RESET button to select the letter of
your choice and proceed on to the next space to
the right.
If you make a mistake and would like to clear or
replace a letter, perform the following steps:
PERSONALIZE NAME is the last option available to
program in the PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. Pressing
the OPTION button after this setting will exit you from the
PERSONAL OPTIONS menu. The last item you were in
prior to entering PERSONAL OPTIONS will then display
on the DIC.
6.1. Press the RESET button to reach the letter
you would like to change.
6.2. Press the OPTION button to scroll through
the letter choices.
6.3. Press the RESET button to select the letter
and proceed on to the next space to the right.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Setting the Clock
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
To set the clock:
1. Press and hold H until the correct hour displays.
2. Press and hold M until the correct minute displays.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
3. Press the tune knob to select between the 12 or
24 hour display format.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
The clock mode automatically times out with the
changed display format set as the current default setting.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 4-2.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Radio(s)
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system
on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume.
MUTE: Press to silence the system. Press again to turn
the sound on.
This button is not available on the Six-Disc CD Radio.
4 (Information): Press until the desired display is
shown, then hold for two seconds until radio beeps once
to change the default display. The selected display is now
the default.
For RDS:
Press 4 to change the display. The display options are
station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name
of the program (if available).
Single CD Radio shown, Six-Disc CD Radio similar
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
For XM™:
Press 4 to retrieve four different categories of information
related to the current song or channel: Artist, Song Title,
Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
An indicator light on the upper left side of the radio
flashes when the ignition is off, to indicate the theft
deterrent feature is set. For more information, see
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the Fade:
Audio Settings
Press and release O e until FADE displays
Press and hold O e when no tone or speaker control
is displayed to adjust all tone and speaker controls
to the middle position. AUDIO SETTINGS CENTERED
displays.
• Turn the O e knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level
Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
changes to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): The radio saves
separate AUTO EQ settings for each preset and source.
O e (Bass/Treble): To adjust the Bass or Treble:
Press and release O e until BASS or TREBLE
For vehicles without the Bose® sound system:
displays.
• Press AUTO EQ to select equalization settings
designed for CLASSICAL, POP, ROCK, JAZZ,
TALK, and COUNTRY.
• Turn the O e knob to increase or to decrease the
level.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level
• Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
For vehicles with the Bose® sound system:
changes to the middle position.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
O e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the Balance:
Press and release O e until BALANCE displays.
• Press AUTO EQ to select equalization settings
from EQ1 through EQ6.
• Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble
settings.
• Turn the O e knob to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
• Press and hold the O e knob until the level
changes to the middle position.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with the Bose® sound system:
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): Automatic volume
automatically adjusts the audio system to make up
for road and wind noise, by increasing the volume
as vehicle speed increases.
For vehicles without the Bose® sound system:
1. Set the volume at the desired level.
Vehicles with the Bose® sound system include Bose®
AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. AudioPilot®
continuously adjusts the audio system equalization
to compensate for background noise. This feature
is most effective at lower radio volume settings where
background noise can affect how well the audio is heard.
At higher volume settings, there may be little or no
adjustments by AudioPilot®. For additional information
on AudioPilot®, visit bose.com/audiopilot.
2. Press AUTO n to select AUTO VOLUME MIN
(minimum), AUTO VOLUME MED (medium), or
AUTO VOLUME MAX (maximum). Each higher
setting provides more volume compensation
at faster vehicle speeds.
To use AudioPilot®:
1. Set the volume at the desired level.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME OFF
2. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME ON
displays to turn automatic volume off.
displays.
3. Press AUTO n until AUTO VOLUME OFF
displays to turn off AudioPilot®.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Using the Radio
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. The station name or call
letters display while the radio is tuned to an RDS station.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and works only when the information
is available. In rare cases, a radio station can broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features
to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
With RDS, the radio can:
Finding an FM/AM/XM Station
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming.
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, XM1
or XM2.
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies.
O e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
• Display messages from radio stations.
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements.
• Provide the time of day.
t SEEK u : Press to go to the previous or to the next
station and stay there.
The radio only stops at stations with a strong signal.
• Provide a program type (PTY) for current
programming.
t SCAN u : Press and hold t or u for two seconds
until FREQUENCY SCAN displays. The radio goes
to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes on to
• Provide the name of the program being broadcast.
the next station. Press t or u again to stop scanning.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scan preset stations:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM Satellite Radio Service Only)
Press and hold t or u for four seconds until PRESET
SCAN displays. The radio goes to the next preset station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next preset
station. Press t or u again or one of the pushbuttons
to stop scanning presets.
To select an XM station by category:
1. Press CAT. The last selected category displays.
2. Turn the O e knob to select a category.
3. Press t or u to go to a category’s station.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal.
SEEKING CATEGORY displays.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press to play stations that
are programmed to the radio preset pushbuttons.
4. To go to another station within that category,
press the CAT button to display the category,
Setting Preset Stations
then press t or u to go to another station.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2), and equalization settings for
each station can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONE
displays and the radio returns to the last station tuned.
SCAN: To scan the stations within a category:
1. Press CAT. The last selected category displays.
To set presets:
2. Turn the O e knob to select a category.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Press and hold t or u until a beep sounds and
SCAN CATEGORY displays. The radio begins
scanning the stations in the category.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
4. Press t or u to stop scanning.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until the radio beeps once.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll through
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Displays if the radio is
no longer configured properly for the vehicle. The vehicle
must be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
the message, press and release 4 . A new group of
words display after every press of the button. Once
the complete message has displayed, INFO disappears
from the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing this
button. The last message until a new message is
received or the radio is tuned to a different station.
LOC (Locked): Displays when the THEFTLOCK®
system has locked up. The vehicle must be returned to
your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer/retailer.
NO INFO displays when a message is not available from
a station.
RDS Messages
TRAF (Traffic): TA (traffic) displays when the station
broadcasts traffic announcements, the announcement
will be played.
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! displays. The announcement is
heard, even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
If a CD is playing, play stops during the announcement.
Alert announcements cannot be turned off.
Press TRAF and the radio seeks to a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements. When a station
is found, the radio stops seeking and TA displays.
NO TRAFFIC INFO displays if a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements can not be found.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
Press TRAF to turn off the traffic announcements if TA is
on the display.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
The radio plays the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CD if the
last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
INFO (information) displays. Press 4 to see the message.
The message can display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
This function does not apply to XM Satellite Radio
Service.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
Radio Messages for XM Only
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
Messages later in this section for further detail.
M (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
To insert one CD:
Using the CD Player
The CD player can play smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring.
1. Press M .
A CD in the player it stays in the player when the
ignition is turned off. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
2. Load a CD and insert the CD partway into the
slot, label side up when INSERT CD # displays.
The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
Loading a CD
1. Press and hold M for two seconds. Two beeps
Single CD Radio:
sound and LOAD ALL DISCS displays.
Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up, until
the player pulls the CD in. The CD begins playing
automatically.
2. Load a CD and insert the CD partway into the
slot, label side up when INSERT CD # displays.
The player pulls the CD in.
The CD symbol displays when a CD is inserted, and
the track number displays when each new track starts
to play.
3. Wait for INSERT CD # to display after the previous
CD is loaded, then load the next CD. The CD player
takes up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs, press
the M button to cancel the loading function. The radio
begins to play the last CD loaded.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization is stored when a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
Playing a CD
O e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous track.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse within the
current track.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radio
for future listening.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold to fast forward
through the current track.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. CD displays when a CD is in the player. If
your system has a remote playback device, pressing this
button a second time allows the remote device to play.
t SEEK u : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the CD.
X (Eject): Press to eject a CD from the Single CD
Radio and the Six-Disc CD Radio.
Single CD Radio: Press X to eject a CD.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
t SCAN u : To scan one CD, press and hold either
arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays
for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press either
arrow again, to stop scanning.
Press X to eject the CD that is currently playing.
To eject multiple CDs:
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until SCAN displays and a beep
sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the
first track of each loaded CD. Press either arrow again,
to stop scanning.
1. Press and hold X for two seconds. A beep sounds
and EJECT ALL displays.
2. The ejected CD can be removed when REMOVE
DISC displays.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the M or X .
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CD is automatically pulled back into the player if
the CD is not removed after 25 seconds. Pushing a CD
back into the player, before the 25 second time period is
complete causes the player to sense an error and the CD
player tries to eject the CD several times before stopping.
Single CD Radio:
Press and release RDM, until RANDOM DISC PLAY
displays. Press and release the RDM until RANDOM
OFF displays to turn off random play.
Six-Disc CD Radio:
Wait for the timer to expire before pressing X again.
• Press and release RDM until RANDOM DISC PLAY
displays to play the tracks on one CD in random
order. Once all tracks on this disc have played,
RANDOM DISC PLAY will repeat.
Pressing X repeatedly after trying to push a CD
in manually causes the CD players 25-second eject
timer to reset.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track or an entire CD
over again.
• Press and release RDM until RANDOM ALL DISCS
displays to play the tracks on all of the CDs that are
loaded in random order.
Single CD Radio:
• Press and release RDM until RANDOM OFF
displays to turn off random play.
Press RPT to hear a track over again, REPEAT
displays. Press again to turn off repeat, REPEAT OFF
displays.
R (Song List): The Song List feature can save
Six-Disc CD Radio:
20 track selections.
• Press RPT until REPEAT displays to repeat a track.
To save tracks:
• Press RPT until REPEAT ONE DISC displays to
repeat an entire CD
1. If S-LIST is displayed, press R to turn it off.
2. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use u or O e knob to
select the track to be saved.
• Press RPT until REPEAT OFF displays to turn off
repeat.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD or all of
the loaded CDs.
3. Press and hold R until a beep sounds and
ADDED SONG displays.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to save other selections.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SONGLIST FULL displays if more than 20 selections
are stored.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To play tracks:
1. Press R . One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.
The recorded tracks begin to play in the order they
were saved
To end song list mode, press R . One beep sounds
and S-LIST is removed from the display.
Care of CDs and the CD Player
Care of CDs
2. Press t or u to go back or forward within the
saved tracks.
To delete tracks:
Store CD(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc. If the bottom of a CD
is damaged it may not play properly or at all. Do not touch
the bottom of a CD while handling it. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
1. Press R to turn song list on. S-LIST displays.
2. Press t or u , use the O e knob to select the
desired track to be deleted.
3. Press and hold R until SONG REMOVED displays.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
To delete the entire song list:
1. Press the R button to turn song list on. S-LIST
displays.
2. Press and hold R for more than four seconds.
One beep sounds and SONGLIST EMPTY
displays to confirm that the song list has been
deleted.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-2.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add labels to a CD, it could get caught in the CD
player. Use a marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s
front auxiliary input jack to use a portable audio player.
The radio displays AUX INPUT DEVICE when a device
is connected and begins playing audio from that device.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they could damage the
CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Turn to increase or
decrease the volume of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments can be made from the portable
device.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE displays. If a portable
audio player is not connected, AUX INPUT DEVICE
does not display.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output;
do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary
input jack. An external audio device can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio
listening.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supported Bit Rates
Using an MP3
MP3 Format
The following bit rates are supported: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Radios with the MP3 feature can only play CD-R discs.
Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on the
same disc.
File Naming
Supported File Structure
Radios with the MP3 feature support up to:
• 50 folders.
ID3v1 and ID3v2 tags are supported. The track name
contained in the ID3 tag is shown on the display.
The display only shows up to 32 characters for track
and file names.
• 11 folders in depth.
• 50 playlists.
If the track name is not contained in the ID3 tag, the
display shows the file name without the file extension.
Playlists
• 255 files.
Playlists that do not have a .mp3 or .wpl extension may
not work.
• 10 sessions.
Root Directory:
Preprogrammed playlists created by WinAmp™,
MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software are
supported and they cannot be edited using the radio.
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory display as F1 ROOT.
Empty Folder:
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD, one folder,
or all of the loaded CDs.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays. The CD
should begin playing and the CD symbol displays.
Press and release RDM until:
• RANDOM DISC PLAY displays to play the tracks
on the CD in random order.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD-R starts to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
• RANDOM FOLDER displays to play the tracks in
the folder in random order.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
• RANDOM ALL DISCS displays to play the tracks on
all of the CDs that are loaded in random order.
• RANDOM OFF displays to turn off random play.
Order of Play
Tracks are played sequentially in the following order:
1. Playlists.
RPT (Repeat): Press to hear a track, CD, or a folder
over again.
Press and release RPT until:
2. Files contained in the root directory.
3. Files contained in folders.
• REPEAT displays to repeat a track.
• REPEAT ONE DISC displays to repeat a CD.
• REPEAT FOLDER displays to repeat a folder.
• REPEAT OFF displays to turn off repeated play.
O / e (Tune): Turn to go to the next or previous
track.
{ (Previous Folder): Press to go to the first track in
the previous folder. Press and hold to reverse through the
current track.
t SEEK u : Press t to go to the start of the
current track, if more than eight seconds have played.
Press u to go to the next track. Press t or u more than
once to continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
| (Next Folder): Press to go to the first track in the
next folder. Press and hold to fast forward the current
track.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CH Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
4 (Information): Press to display the artist name and
album contained in the ID3 tag.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening
to the radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is
loaded.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Locked: The XM receiver in the vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process should
take no longer than 30 seconds.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal.
When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned
to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System
Navigation/Radio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the order
the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system
will ask for the number to be re-entered.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Calls can be made using the following commands:
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with
“Digit dial using <phone name>, please say
the first digit to dial” followed by a tone.
• Dial
• Digit Dial
• Call
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
• Re-dial
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Using the Re-dial Command
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the last
number called from the connected Bluetooth phone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard through
the audio speakers.
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
Receiving a Call
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c to ignore a call.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Call Waiting
Ending a Call
Press c to end a call.
Muting a Call
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can
be muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
To Mute a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• Press c to disconnect the current call and switch
followed by a tone.
to the call on hold.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
Three-Way Calling
To Cancel Mute
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Voice Pass-Thru
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Sending a Number During a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on
how to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
and LOCKED displays if the radio is stolen or moved
to a different vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When the when the ignition is in the off position, a
blinking red light on the upper left side of the radio
indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c (Phone On Hook): Press to reject an incoming
call, or end a current call.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
w x (Next/Previous): Press to change radio stations
or select tracks on a CD.
To change radio stations:
• Press w or x to go to the next or to the previous
radio station and stay there. The radio only seeks
stations with a strong signal that are in the
selected band.
• Press and hold w or x for two seconds until
SCAN displays and a beep sounds to scan stations.
The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press again to stop
scanning.
For vehicles with steering wheel controls, some audio
controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
• Press and hold w or x for four seconds until
PRESET SCAN displays and a beep sounds to
scan presets. The radio goes to a station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the next station.
Press again to stop scanning.
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold V g for longer than two seconds to interact
information.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select tracks on a CD:
Radio Reception
• Press w or x to go to the next or to the previous
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
track when a CD is playing.
• Press and hold w or x for more than two seconds
to scan the current CD. The CD goes to the next
track, plays the first 10 seconds, then goes to
the next track. Press again to stop scanning.
• Press and hold w or x for more than four seconds
to scan all of the CDs loaded. The CD goes to
the next CD, plays the first 10 seconds of each
track, then goes to the next CD. Press again to
stop scanning.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press to play stations that
are programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Diversity Antenna System
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
The AM-FM antenna is a hidden self tuning system.
It optimizes the AM and FM signals relative to
the vehicle’s position and radio station source.
No maintenance or adjustments are needed.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Cellular Phone Usage
For vehicles with XM Satellite Radio Service, the
antenna is located on the roof or on the trunk lid of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions
for clear radio reception.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is
to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster
with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic
and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot
of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake
is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can
take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second.
But that is only an average. It might be less with
one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more
with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Under certain weather or operating conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal, or other noise might
be heard with the vehicle’s performance braking system.
This brake system is designed for superior fade
resistance and consistent operation using high
performance brake pads. Brake noise and brake dust
are normal and do not affect system performance.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. A motor or clicking
noise might be heard and the brake pedal might be felt
to move a little during a stop, but this is normal.
page 3-41.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The SERVICE TRACTION
SYSTEM message and the
TCS warning light will come
on if there is a problem with
TCS. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that the rear wheels are spinning too much or are
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttle and managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
page 3-56.
The TRACTION SYSTEM ACTIVE message displays
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when TCS
is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56. The system may be heard or felt while
it is working, but this is normal.
When this light and the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
message are on, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, the system should always be left on.
TCS can be turned off if needed.
If cruise control is being used when TCS begins to
limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged
page 3-10.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the button located
on the console.
Active Handling System
The Active Handling System is a computer controlled
system that helps the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This is
accomplished by selectively applying any one of the
vehicle’s brakes.
The ACTIVE HANDLING message will come on when the
system is operating. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information. The system may be
heard or felt while it is working. This is normal.
The SERVICE ACTIVE
HANDLING SYSTEM
message will be displayed,
the instrument cluster light
will come on, and a sound
will be heard if there is a
problem with the system.
The system can be turned on or off at any time by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button. The DIC will
display the appropriate message when the button is
pushed.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
more information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
When this light and the SERVICE ACTIVE HANDLING
SYSTEM message are on, the system is not
operational. Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Active Handling System comes on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To help maintain
directional control of the vehicle, the system should
always be left on. The system can be turned off needed.
If the Active Handling System is turned off, the Traction
Control System will also be turned off. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a flat
tire and the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
TIRE FLAT, or if the TPM system is malfunctioning and
the DIC displays SERVICE TIRE MONITOR, the Active
Handling System will be affected as follows:
• The Active Handling System cannot be turned off by
the driver.
To turn the system
• If the Active Handling System is off, it will be turned
on automatically.
off, press the ACTIVE
HANDLING button on the
console for five seconds.
The system can be turned
back on at any time by
pressing the button.
• Competitive Driving Mode is unavailable.
• The Active Handling System will feel different in
aiding and maintaining directional control.
The DIC will display the
appropriate message when
the button is pushed.
Competitive Driving Mode
The driver can select this optional handling mode by
pressing the ACTIVE HANDLING button on the console
quickly two times. COMPETITIVE DRIVING MODE will
be displayed in the DIC. Competitive Driving Mode allows
the driver to have full control of the rear wheels while the
Active Handling System helps maintain directional control
of the vehicle by selective brake application. This involves
less intervention than with both the Active Handling
System and Traction Control Systems on. The Traction
Control System will not be operating. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light will be on when
the vehicle is in the
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
Competitive Driving Mode.
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction
to move the vehicle.
Selective Ride Control
The vehicle may have a ride control system called
Magnetic Selective Ride Control. The system provides
the following performance benefits:
When the ACTIVE HANDLING button is pressed again,
the Active Handling and Traction Control Systems
will be on. The TRACTION SYSTEM AND ACTIVE
HANDLING-ON message will be displayed briefly in
the DIC and a chime will be heard.
• Reduced Impact Harshness
• Improved Road Isolation
• Improved High-Speed Stability
• Improved Handling Response
• Better Control of Body Ride Motions
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This knob is located on the
center console. Turn it to
select the suspension
of your choice.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Magnetic Speed Variable Assist
Steering System
This system continuously adjusts the effort felt when
steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when
parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to the road conditions.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
The setting can be changed at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and the vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best
handling while providing a smooth ride. The Tour and
Sport modes will feel similar on a smooth road. Select
a new setting whenever driving conditions change.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Three Driver Information Center (DIC) messages
(SERVICE RIDE CONTROL, SHOCKS INOPERATIVE
and MAXIMUM SPEED 80 MPH (129 KM/H) display
when a malfunction occurs with the Selective Ride
Control system. Refer to DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56 for more information.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
greater than 534°F (279°C). After conversion to the high
performance brake fluid, follow the brake fluid service
recommendations outlined by the fluid manufacturer.
Do not use silicone or DOT-5 brake fluids.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
Racing or competitive driving may affect the vehicle
warranty. See the warranty book before using the
vehicle for racing or other competitive driving.
If the vehicle is a ZO6 or ZR1 model or has the Z51
performance package, it has greaseable outer ends on
both of the rear toe-links. Under normal use, lubrication
should be performed as described in the maintenance
If using the vehicle for racing, lubrication should be
performed at the end of each racing day. See your
dealer/retailer for lubrication and make sure any needed
repairs are made at once. Proper procedures for
performing these services can be found in the service
manual. See Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
Notice: If you use the vehicle for racing or other
competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than
it would with normal use. Low oil levels can damage
the engine. For information on how to add oil, see
Z06 and ZR1 Only: Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near the upper mark that shows
the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick.
Except Z06 and ZR1: Be sure to check the oil level
often during racing or other competitive driving and
keep the level at or near 1 quart (1 L) above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range on the
engine oil dipstick. After the competitive driving,
remove excess oil so that the level on the dipstick is
not above the upper mark that shows the proper
operating range.
If the vehicle is used for racing or other competitive
driving, the rear axle fluid temperatures may be higher
than would occur in normal driving. We recommend
that the rear axle fluid be drained and refilled with new
fluid after every 24 hours of racing or competitive
page 6-12 for what fluid to use.
Z06 and ZR1 Only: For racing or competitive driving, it is
recommended that the brake fluid be replaced with a high
performance brake fluid that has a dry boiling point
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Street High Performance Brake Burnishing
Procedure
ZR1 Brake Burnish Procedure
Notice: These procedures are specific to the ZR1
with ceramic brake rotors. These procedures should
not be run on other Corvette models as damage
may result.
Run this procedure in a safe manner and in compliance
with all local and state ordinances/laws regarding
motor vehicle operation. Run this procedure only on
dry pavement.
Notice: The new vehicle break-in period should
be completed before performing the brake
burnish procedure or damage may occur to the
powertrain/engine. See New Vehicle Break-In
on page 2-21.
1. From a stop, accelerate as rapidly as possible
without activating traction control to a speed of
60 mph (97 kph).
2. Use enough pedal force to completely stop the
vehicle in 4 to 5 seconds. If ABS activates,
braking is too hard.
When performed as instructed, these procedures will
not damage the brakes. During the burnishing
procedure, the brake pads will smoke and produce an
odor. The braking force and pedal travel may increase.
After the procedure is complete, the brake pads may
appear white at the rotor contact.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2, 50 times. This should take
about 10 minutes.
4. After completing the 50 stops, cool the brakes by
driving for 5 miles (8 km) at 60 mph (97 kph).
As with all high performance brake systems, some
amount of brake squeal is normal.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Racing/Track Brake Burnish Procedure
Driving at Night
To prepare the ZR1 brake system for track events and
racing, the Street High Performance Brake Burnish
as described previously should be completed.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because
some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
In addition to completing the Street High Performance
Brake Burnishing Procedure, the following additional
procedure needs to be completed to make the
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
ZR1 brake system ready for track events and racing.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
This procedure should only be run on a track and only
on dry pavement.
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Notice: Brake pedal fade will occur during this track
burnish procedure and can cause brake pedal travel
and force to increase. This could extend stopping
distance until the brakes are fully burnished.
1. Drive a normal first lap and not too aggressive.
2. Laps 2 and 3 should be gradually driven faster and
more aggressive, while allowing for reduced brake
output and increased stopping distance due to
brake fade.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
3. Lap 4 as near to full speed, while allowing for
reduced brake output and increased stopping
distance due to brake fade.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as
we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver might need at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4. Laps 5 and 6 should be cool down laps.
5. Lap 7 should be normal driving or an easy out lap.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing
or flowing water.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling
to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
• Allow extra following distance.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and
other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warnings and be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
on page 5-62.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Things to check on your own include:
Other driving tips include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
might also activate. When driving through deep
snow, turn off the traction control system to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
For more information about carbon monoxide,
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about
to keep warm also helps.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and
to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as
possible to save fuel.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. Turn the traction control
system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little
as possible. For a manual transmission, shift slowly
between either 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse),
allowing the wheels to stop before shifting into gear.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels
stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse
directions causes a rocking motion that could free
the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a
few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle
does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-28.
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system
in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system
to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use
the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of
your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you
will find the label attached below the door latch.
This label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-71.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification Label” later in this section.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Your vehicle is neither designed nor intended
to tow a trailer.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 1 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
400 lbs (181 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached
to the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry. See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in this section.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy towing the vehicle
may cause damage because of reduced ground
clearance. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck
or trailer.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/
retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled
vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If the vehicle
must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” earlier in
this section.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a
trailer.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added
to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/
retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as
airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium
batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling
may be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code W),
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,
you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the
engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
additional information.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code R) or the
7.0L V8 engine (VIN Code E), use premium unleaded
gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For
best performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or
higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for
service.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel door release
button is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel. Push
the button to release the
fuel door.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also a manual
fuel door release tab.
It is located against the
upper trim in the rear
{ CAUTION:
compartment on the driver
side of the vehicle. Pull the
tab to release the fuel door.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below
the fuel fill opening.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-44.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
The CHECK GAS CAP message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
page 3-56 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove
the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off
the pump or by notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
page 3-44.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle below the
instrument panel on the
driver side.
2. Go to the side of the vehicle and pull up on the rear
edge of the hood, near the windshield.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, just pull the hood down and
close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
B. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-42.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
C. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
J. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 6.2L LS9 Supercharged V8 engine and you are facing the front, when you open the hood,
here is what you will see:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-33.
G. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
H. Passenger Compartment Air Filter (Out of View).
I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
E. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-42.
K. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).
F. Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir (If Equipped).
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the 7.0L LS7 V8 engine and you are facing the driver side of the vehicle, when you open the
hood, here is what you will see:
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
(Except ZO6 and ZR1)
D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), check the engine oil
level right away. For more information, see Driver
engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
F. Dry Sump Engine Oil Tank. See “Changing Engine
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-42.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil a few minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a lint-free paper
towel or a cloth, then push it back in all the way.
3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip down
and read the level on the cross-hatched area. Oil
levels that fall in the cross-hatched area are normal.
4. Push the dipstick back in all the way.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
(Except ZO6 and ZR1)
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended
oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
for additional information on engine oil.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
The dipstick is located on the dry sump engine oil tank.
for the location of the dry sump engine oil tank.
Checking Engine Oil (ZO6 and ZR1)
These vehicles have a racetrack-ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when checking
the engine oil level. Follow this procedure closely when
checking the engine oil level.
The engine oil level must be checked when the engine is
warm. Cold oil level in the dry sump tank may not indicate
the actual amount of oil in the system. With this system,
engine oil is contained in an external tank, separate
from the engine. Under normal operating conditions,
the oil pan under the engine does not store any oil.
A. Engine Oil Dipstick
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been parked for an extended period
without the engine being started, some oil will seep back
into the oil pan, reducing the amount of oil held in the dry
sump tank and there could be no engine oil at all showing
on the dipstick. This is normal since the dipstick is
designed to read engine oil level only after the engine has
run long enough to reach normal operating temperature.
Do not add engine oil based on cold engine dipstick
readings. The engine oil level on the dipstick will also be
inaccurate if checked while the engine is running.
3. Wait at least five minutes (but not more than
20 minutes) to allow oil to drain and settle in
the engine.
4. Remove the dipstick from the external engine oil
tank and clean it with a lint-free paper towel or a
cloth. Re-insert the dipstick into the external oil tank,
pushing it all the way in until it stops.
5. Remove the dipstick from the oil tank and read the
level on the cross-hatched area. Oil levels that fall
in the cross-hatched area are normal.
1. To obtain an accurate engine oil level reading,
warm up the engine to at least 175°F (80°C).
Cold oil will not give a correct oil level reading.
2. Once the engine is warm, turn off the engine.
Checking the oil while the engine is running
will result in an incorrect oil level reading.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the external
engine oil tank and fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil (ZO6 and ZR1)
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil through the oil fill cap opening in
the oil tank. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back
into the oil tank when through.
Changing Engine Oil and Filter
(ZO6 and ZR1)
for additional information on engine oil.
These vehicles have a racetrack-ready dry sump engine
lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when changing
the engine oil and filter. Follow this procedure closely
when changing the engine oil and filter.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Once the oil has been drained from the engine,
remove the engine oil filter and allow the oil to
drain.
3. Re-install both drain plugs and tighten them to
18 lb ft (25 Y ).
4. Replace the oil filter and tighten it to 18 lb ft
on page 6-14 for the correct filter.
5. Oil is filled through the opening in the top of the
external engine oil tank. Remove the oil fill cap.
6. Add 10.5 quarts (9.9 L) of oil to the oil tank.
7. Install the oil fill cap and insert the dipstick, if
removed.
8. Start the engine and let it run at idle for at least
15 seconds. This will circulate the fresh engine
oil through the lubrication system.
ZO6 Shown, ZR1 Similar
A. Engine Oil Drain Plugs
9. Shut off the engine and check the oil level as
described under “Checking Engine Oil (ZO6
and ZR1).”
B. Seals
1. Remove the two engine oil drain plugs from the
bottom of the engine oil pan. One drain plug
drains the external oil tank via the oil transfer supply
line. The other drain plug drains residual oil from
the crankcase sump. Allow the oil to drain.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil
meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
might not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z06 and ZR1 models have a racetrack-ready dry sump
engine lubrication system. This high-performance system
operates differently than a standard engine lubrication
system and requires a special procedure when changing
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM4718M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on. Change
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil
change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer that indicates when to
change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine
revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage.
Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil
change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life
system to work properly, the system must be reset every
time the oil is changed.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message after an
oil change:
1. Press the TRIP button so the OIL LIFE percentage
is displayed.
2. Press RESET and hold for two seconds. OIL LIFE
REMAINING 100% will appear.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace them at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
Notice: If you spray water into the engine air
cleaner/filter intake and water enters the engine
air cleaner/filter housing, you could damage your
vehicle’s engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not spray water into the
engine air cleaner/filter intake and/or housing.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If you are cleaning the vehicle with the hood open, take
care not to spray water directly near the filter opening
of the air cleaner, as shown in the illustration, as
this could damage the vehicle’s engine.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:
6.2 L LS9 Engine shown, 7.0 L LS7 Engine similar
6.2 L LS3 Engine
1. Remove the screws holding the air cleaner
assembly.
2. Pull the air cleaner assembly back to gain access
to the filter element.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
3. Remove the screws holding the filter element in
place.
5. Reverse Steps 1 and 3 to replace the air
cleaner/filter cover.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/
retailer service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult,
you should have this done at your dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check and What to Use
Cooling System (Engine)
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
on page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper fluid
page 6-12. The fluid requires changing every two years.
7.0L Engine shown, 6.2L Engine similar
How to Check and Add Fluid
Visually check the clutch fluid reservoir to make sure the
fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of the
reservoir. The hydraulic clutch fluid system should be
closed and sealed.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to top-off
the fluid level. Remove the cap only when necessary to
add the proper fluid until the level reaches the MIN line.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Cooling System (Intercooler)
The 6.2L LS9 supercharged V8 engine has an
intercooler cooling system. See Engine Compartment
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The intercooler cooling system has a special procedure
for draining and adding coolant. Because this procedure
is difficult, see your dealer/retailer for service if the
intercooler is low on coolant. The procedure can also be
found in the service manual. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-16.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Loosen, but do not completely unscrew the bleeder
valve to check for coolant in the system.
Checking Coolant
4. Tighten the bleeder valve if there is coolant flowing
out of the bleeder valve.
5. If there is no coolant flowing out of the bleeder
valve, there could be a leak in the system.
Tighten the bleeder valve and contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
1. Verify that the engine and intercooler are no
longer hot.
2. Place a cloth to absorb possible coolant loss under
the driver’s side bleeder valve (A).
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but would not get the overheat warning.
The engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
page 6-12 for more information.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
the FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
When the engine is hot, the level could be higher
than the FULL COLD line. If the coolant is below the
FULL COLD line when the engine is hot, there could
be a leak in the cooling system.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
recovery tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool
for more information.
If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle
to a dealer/retailer for service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
The engine coolant
{ CAUTION:
surge tank is located
toward the rear of the
engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle.
more information on
location.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture directly to the surge tank, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before this is done.
1. When the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot, remove the pressure cap.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture until the level inside
stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark on the front
of the surge tank.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Any time during this
procedure, watch out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level stabilizes at the FULL COLD mark
on the coolant surge tank.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-7.
Check the level in the surge tank when the system
has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the proper
level, repeat Steps 1 through 4, then reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant is not at the proper level
when the system cools down again, see your
dealer/retailer.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running.
If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it is not, do not continue to run the engine and have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
There is an engine coolant temperature gage on
the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant
display a COOLANT OVER TEMPERATURE message
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
information.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
{ CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If in a traffic jam, shift to N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to
P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle.
on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays,
the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle
slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance
from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
Power Steering Fluid
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
reservoir location.
This emergency operating mode lets the vehicle
be driven to a safe place, up to 50 miles (80 km),
in an emergency situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists and the messages COOLANT OVER
TEMPERATURE and REDUCED ENGINE POWER are
displayed, along with the check engine light, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
there is a significant loss in power and engine
performance.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Driving extended distances in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the ignition off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick. There are markings on both sides of
the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
When the vehicle needs windshield washer fluid, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
When the engine
compartment is hot, the
level should be at the HOT
mark. When the engine
compartment is cool,
the level should be at
the FULL COLD mark.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be above the MIN mark on the
reservoir. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system
checked to see if there is a leak.
{ CAUTION:
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is between the MIN and MAX marks.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on
the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough.
You or others could be burned, and the vehicle
could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Wear (Except ZR1)
{ CAUTION:
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
{ CAUTION:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
the brake hydraulic system can damage brake
hydraulic system parts so badly that they will
have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Wear (ZR1 Only)
The ZR1 model does not have built-in brake pad wear
indicators and periodic visual inspection of the brake
pads is required to determine when to replace the
brake pads.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
• Make sure that the brakes have been given
sufficient time to cool and then set the park brake.
The ZR1 also has an electronic brake pad wear sensor
system. When pads are worn, the CHANGE BRAKE
PADS message displays in the Driver Information
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
• Brake pads can be visually inspected through the
wheel by inspecting the outer brake pads at each
wheel.
• Brake pads should be replaced when worn to
two mm of pad thickness. New pads are 10 mm thick.
• In addition, brake pad inspection is required any time
the tires are removed.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Rotors may be chipped if hard contact is
made with the wheel during wheel installation or
removal. Always use the rotor protectors. Be sure
to carefully follow wheel removal and installation
instructions.
Brake Rotor Wear
ZR1 models have ceramic brake rotors. Rotors should
be visually inspected whenever the brake pads are
replaced. Rotors also need to be weighed before brake
pads are replaced to confirm that the rotor mass is
greater than the wear-out mass printed on the rotor.
The rotor can be reused if the weight of the rotor
is above the mass limit. Rotor inspection and weighing
methods can be found in the service manual. See
Brake Rotor Protector
{ CAUTION:
Ceramic rotors will be very hot after operation and
touching them may cause burns. Be sure brake
system is completely cool prior to installation of
protector, or coming in contact with them.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes automatically adjust
for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
A rotor protector should always be installed before any
wheel removal. The protector can be installed by feeding
it through the wheel spokes and slipping it over the outer
edge of the rotor. Leave the protector in place, over the
rotor edge, until the wheel is re-installed. Rotor protectors
are available through your dealer/retailer.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one
that has the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer or the
service manual. To purchase a service manual, see
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
page 2-17.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you try to start your vehicle by pushing
or pulling it, you could damage your vehicle. Do not
push or pull your vehicle to start it; instead, use
the jump starting procedure in this manual to start
your vehicle when the battery has run down.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brakes.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on each vehicle.
6.2 L LS3 shown, 7.0 L LS7 and 6.2 L LS9 similar.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal (A)
and a remote negative (−) terminal (B), as shown
in the illustration, which should be used to jump start
your vehicle.
The remote positive (+) terminal (A) can be
accessed by opening the cover of the engine
compartment fuse block.
The remote negative (−) terminal (B) is located
underneath the engine cover, below the engine
oil fill cap.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for the location of the engine compartment fuse
block and engine oil fill cap.
{ CAUTION:
You will not need to access the battery for jump
starting. The remote terminals are for that purpose.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
{ CAUTION:
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
{ CAUTION:
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal
for this purpose.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the engine fuse block cover to its original
position.
6. You may also need to initialize the power windows.
See “Power Window Initialize” under Power
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Jumper Cable Removal
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To add lubricant when the level is low, use Dexron LS
Gear Oil 75W-90 (GM Part No. US. 88862624, in
Canada 88862625) meeting GM Specification 9986290.
To completely refill after draining, see Recommended
bottom of the filler plug hole with the Synthetic Gear
Lubricant.
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming
drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is
recommended that you take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After an HID
headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice
that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was
originally. This is normal.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
{ CAUTION:
The low beam high intensity discharge lighting
system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to
service any of the system components, you could
be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace a high-beam or front parking/turn signal/
DRL bulb:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and
Parking Lamps
1. Turn the wheel to allow access to the wheel well.
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Front Parking/Turn Signal/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
If the low-beam headlamp needs to be replaced, see
your dealer/retailer. See High Intensity Discharge (HID)
2. Remove the three outer fasteners to move the
access panel back.
3. Remove the outer cover to expose the high-beam
headlamp bulb socket.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the headlamp
bulb by releasing the
outer tabs from
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
the socket.
To replace a stoplamp, taillamp/turn signal bulb:
1. Remove the screw from the top of the lamp
assembly.
5. Remove the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning
the bulb socket counterclockwise.
6. Replace the high-beam headlamp bulb with a new
bulb and reattach to the bulb socket.
Replace the front parking/turn signal bulb by turning
the bulb socket clockwise.
7. Reverse the Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall.
2. Tilt the lamp assembly toward you.
3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and pull it out.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the
socket.
Windshield Replacement
The windshield is part of the Head-Up Display (HUD)
system. If you ever have to get the windshield replaced,
get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image
may look out of focus.
5. Push the new bulb in the bulb socket until it snaps
into place.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly by first lining up the
tabs on the bottom of the lamp assembly with the
tabs in the vehicle, then slide it in.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
7. Replace the screw at the top of the lamp assembly.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Front Parking/Turn
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For the proper type and
page 6-14.
Signal/Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
5702KA
Headlamp, High-Beam Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp
Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
H9
W3W
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly every six months. Allowing the wiper blade arm
to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs
would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Do not
allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the wiper blade assembly:
4. Remove the insert from the blade assembly (A).
The insert has two notches at one end that are
locked by the bottom claws of the blade assembly.
At the notch end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
1. Open the hood to gain access to the windshield
wipers.
2. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
To install the new wiper insert:
1. Slide the insert (D), notched end last, into the end
with the two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the
way through the blade claws at the opposite end (B).
The plastic caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is
fully installed.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
3. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab (C). Pull down on the blade assembly (A) to
release it from the wiper arm hook (F).
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Be sure the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
Installation guide:
3. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
4. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
page 5-71.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter
tires, there may be decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After
switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
handling and braking.
Low-Profile Performance Tire
The original equipment tires on your vehicle are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These
tires are designed for very responsive driving on
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile tires and that they tend
to wear faster.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load
range, and speed rating as the original equipment
tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
Winter Tires
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as winter
tires on snow or ice covered roads.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The example below shows a typical
passenger (p-metric) tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger (p-metric) vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating
is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry
a load.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-71.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-23.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-77.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, you will not need to stop on the side
of the road to change the tire. You can just keep on
driving. The shorter the distance you drive and the
slower the speed, the greater the chance that the tire
will not have to be replaced. If you drive on a deflated
run-flat tire for 25 miles (40 km) or less and at speeds of
55 mph (90 km/h) or less, there is a good chance that
the tire can be repaired. The tires on coupe, convertible
and Z06 models can operate effectively with no air
pressure for up to 100 miles (160 km) at speeds up to
55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would then have to
be replaced. The tires on ZR1 models can operate
effectively with no air pressure for up to 50 miles (80 km)
at speeds up to 55 mph (90 km/h), but the tire would
then have to be replaced. When a tire is filled with air, it
provides a cushion between the road and the wheel.
Because you will not have this cushion when driving on
a deflated tire, try to avoid potholes that could damage
your wheel and require replacement of it.
Run-Flat Tires
This vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. There is no
spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place
to store a tire in the vehicle. Run-flat tires perform
so well without any air that a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is used to alert you if a tire has
lost pressure.
{ CAUTION:
When the low tire warning light is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster, your vehicle’s
handling capabilities will be reduced during severe
maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You or others could be
injured. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h)
when the low tire warning light is displayed.
Drive cautiously and check your tire pressures
as soon as you can.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some road hazards can damage a tire beyond repair.
This damage could occur even before you have driven on
the tire in a deflated condition. When a tire has been
damaged, or if you have driven any distance on a run-flat
tire, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center
to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should
be replaced. To maintain your vehicle’s run-flat feature,
all replacement tires must be self-supporting tires. As
soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or
run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or
replacement. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat
servicing facility, call Roadside Assistance. For phone
numbers and Roadside Service details see Roadside
CAUTION: (Continued)
attempt to repair, replace, dismount, or mount a
run-flat tire. Let only an authorized run-flat service
center repair, replace, dismount, and mount
run-flat tires.
The valve stems on your run-flat tires have sensors that
are part of the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
sensors contain batteries which are designed to last
for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your
dealer/retailer if you ever need to have a wheel
replaced, or if the sensors ever need replacement.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire
valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in the
vehicle’s run-flat tires. This damage would not be
covered by warranty. Do not use liquid sealants
in the vehicle’s run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires are constructed differently than other
tires and could explode during improper service.
You or others could be injured or killed if you
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more
weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
Check your tires once a month or more.
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you will be driving your vehicle at speeds of 175 mph
(282 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold
inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure
shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever
is lower. See the example following. When you end this
high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Racing or other competitive driving may affect the
warranty coverage of your vehicle. See your warranty
booklet for more information.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
additional information.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly on your
vehicle. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
additional information.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light,
located in the instrument
panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
At the same time a message to check the pressure in
a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message appear at each ignition cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-56.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light
should go off once the TPMS sensors are installed
and the sensor matching process is performed
successfully.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or
not completed successfully. The DIC message
should go off after successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. Under these conditions the TPMS
malfunction light (low tire warning light) comes on,
and at the same time the DIC message is displayed.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
When It Is Time for New Tires
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage Also
check for damaged wheels. See When It Is Time for
on page 5-82.
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front
to rear. Due to this, the tires should not be rotated.
Each tire and wheel should be used only in the
position it is in.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your
original equipment tires may not be available for H, V,
W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow
tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s
maximum speed capability.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands or types, may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand,
and type tires on all four wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, antilock brakes, traction
control, and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{ CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel Replacement
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Tightening Wheel Lug Nuts
{ CAUTION:
Tighten the wheel lug nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
traction device only if its manufacturer
{ CAUTION:
recommends it for use on the vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage
to the vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove
the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not
spin the wheels. If you do find traction devices that
will fit, install them on the rear tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts.
The area damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash. Use another type of
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Lifting a vehicle can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured. Find
a level place to lift your vehicle. To help prevent
the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
{ CAUTION:
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission
to 1 (First) or R (Reverse).
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle or the vehicle
may fall and cause your or others injury.
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can put blocks in front of and behind the
wheels.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever use a jack to lift your vehicle, follow the
instructions that came with the jack, and be sure to use
the correct lifting points to avoid damaging your vehicle.
Lifting From the Front
Notice: Lifting your vehicle improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To lift your vehicle properly, follow
the advice in this part.
To help prevent vehicle damage:
• Be sure to place a block or pad between the
jack and the vehicle.
• Make sure the jack you are using spans at least
two crossmember ribs.
The front lifting points can be accessed from either side
of your vehicle, behind the front tires.
• Lift only in the areas shown in the following
pictures.
For additional information, see your dealer/retailer
and the Chevrolet Corvette service manual.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Locate the front lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lifting From the Rear
The rear lifting points can be accessed from the rear of
the vehicle, on either the driver’s or passenger’s side.
1. Locate the rear lifting points (A), according to the
illustration shown.
2. Be sure to place a block or pad between the jack
and the vehicle.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain the tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
3. Lift the vehicle with the jack, making sure the jack
spans at least two of the crossmember ribs (B).
For more information, see Doing Your Own Service
The vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment, and no place to store a tire.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle, when new, had run-flat tires. This type of tire
can operate effectively with no air pressure, so you will
not need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat
tire. You can just keep on driving. The shorter the
distance you drive and the slower the speed, the greater
the chance that the run-flat tire will not have to be
replaced. Run-flat tires perform so well without any air
that a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is used to
alert you if a tire has lost pressure. See Run-Flat Tires
page 5-73.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
{ CAUTION:
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
Special tools and procedures are required to
service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and
procedures are not used you or others could be
injured and the vehicle could be damaged. Always
be sure the proper tools and procedures, as
described in the service manual, are used.
To order a service manual, see Service Publications
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coated Moldings
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
These moldings are around the hatch opening in the
rear area.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
• When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft
lint-free cloth dampened with water.
• When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot
lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Cargo Cover and Convenience Net
Wash with warm water and mild detergent, rinse
with cold water and tumble dry on low. Do not use
chlorine bleach.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
{ CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle through an
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
could damage the vehicle. Verify with the manager
of the car wash that the vehicle will fit before
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish on the vehicle.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
ZR1 Carbon Fiber Panels
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Carbon fiber panels can be washed and waxed like any
other panels.
Use a clear or black pigmented wax on the inner hood
carbon fiber panel.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
ZR1 Hood Window
The hood window on the ZR1 can be cleaned in the
same manner as the headlamp lenses. See Cleaning
information.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removable Roof Panel
Convertible Top
The vehicle’s convertible top should be cleaned often.
However, high pressure car washes may cause water to
enter your vehicle.
Notice: If you use a glass treatment and/or
conditioner that contains ethyl alcohol or ethyl
sulfate on the roof panel, you could damage
the panel. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Only use a GM-approved glass
cleaner on the roof panel.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade.
Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge.
A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and
a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Do not
use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching
agents.
Special care is necessary when cleaning, removing,
and/or storing the roof panel.
• Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
the panel.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for
a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle,
then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
• Clean a transparent roof panel with GM Glass
Cleaner. Leave the cleaner on the panel for
one minute, then wipe the panel with a soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use glass cleaner on a painted roof
panel.
To protect the convertible top:
• After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry before you lower it.
• Do not use abrasive cleaning materials on either type
of panel.
• Do not get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted
finish; it could leave streaks.
If water drops are frequently allowed to dry on the roof
panel, impurities in the water will adhere to the top.
These impurities may etch or mar the finish. When the
panel gets wet, dry it off.
• If you decide to go through an automatic car wash,
ask the manager if the equipment could damage
your top.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome
polish on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/
retailer’s body and paint shop.
Fiberglass Springs
(Composite Springs)
Notice: If you use acidic or corrosive cleaning
products, engine degreasers or aluminum cleaning
agents on fiberglass springs, you may damage the
springs. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners when cleaning
your vehicle’s fiberglass springs.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Vehicle Identification
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine
Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-110 for the vehicle’s engine code.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if parts need to be ordered. The label has
the following information:
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses in the fuse
block. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to turn
off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked
right away.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or cigarette
lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the
overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it
fixed.
Vehicles with the ZR–1 package have an intercooler
relay located on the fan shroud. See your dealer/retailer.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Vehicles with the ZR–1 package also have a fuel
system mini-fuse. It is located near the battery in the
battery storage compartment in the rear of the vehicle.
Circuit breakers protect the power seats, power windows,
and other power accessories. When the current load
is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the vehicle, under the instrument
panel and under the toe-board.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Remove the carpet and toe-board covering to access
the fuse block by pulling at the top of each corner of the
panel. Open the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of J-Case fuses,
mini-fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
You can remove fuses using the fuse puller.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
BCK/UP LAMP Reverse Lamps
BTSI SOL/STR Brake Transmission Shift Interlock,
WHL LCK
Steering Wheel Column Lock
Cluster, Heads-Up Display
BLANK
BLANK
Not Used
Not Used
CLSTR/HUD
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
CRUISE
SWITCH
Usage
Fuses
REVERSE
LAMPS
Usage
Reverse Lamps
Cruise Control Switch
CTSY/LAMP
DR LCK
DRIV DR
SWITCH
Courtesy Lamp
Door Locks
RUN CRNK
Run/Crank Relay
SDM/AOS
SWTCH
AIRBAG
SPARE
SPARE
Sensing and Diagnostic Module,
Automatic Occupant Sensing
Module, Airbag
Spare
Spare
Driver Door Switch
ECM
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Exhaust Module (Z06),
Spare (Coupe and Convertible)
EXH MDL
SPARE
Spare
GM LAN
SPARE
STOP LAMP
SWC DM
TELE
SWTCH/MSM
TONNEAU
RELSE
TPA
Spare
Stop Lamp
Steering Wheel Dimming
Telescope Switch, Memory Seat
Module
GM LAN Devices
RUN/CRNK
HTD SEAT/
WPR RLY
HVAC/
PWR SND
IGN SWTCH/
INTR SNSR
Heated Seat, Wiper Relays
Heating. Ventilation/Air Conditioning,
Power Sounder
Tonneau Release
Ignition Switch, Intrusion Sensor
Tonneau Pulldown Actuator
Electric Inside Rearview Mirror,
ISRVM/HVAC
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
ONSTAR
RDO/S-BAND/
VICS
OnStar®
Fuses
BLANK
BLANK
Usage
Blank
Blank
Radio, S-Band, VICS
REAR FOG/
ALDL/TOP
SWTCH
Rear Fog Lamp, Assembly Line
Diagnostic Link Connector,
Convertible Top Switch
FUEL DR
RELSE
Fuel Door Release
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
REAR/FOG
TONNEAU
RELSE
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release
Usage
Rear Fog Lamps
Fuses
PWR SEATS
MSM
PWR/ WNDWS/
TRUNK/FUEL
RELSE
Usage
Power Seats, Memory Seat Module
Tonneau Release
Power Windows, Trunk, Fuel Door
Release
TRUNK RELSE Trunk Release
Fuses
Usage
Auxiliary Power
WPR DWELL
WPR/WSW
Wiper Dwell
Windshield Wiper/Washer
AUX PWR
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
There is one fuse block in the engine compartment
located on the passenger side of the vehicle. See
information on location.
DRVR HTD
SEAT
LTR
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Driver Heated Seat
Cigarette Lighter
PASS HTD
SEAT
Passenger Heated Seat
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
Transmission Control
Module/Transmission
Horn, Alternator Sense
Antilock Braking System (ABS)/Real
Time Damping
4
5
6
7
Wiper
1
2
3
Stoplamps/Back-Up Lamps
Oxygen Sensor
Battery Main 5
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuse
8
Usage
Fuse
23
Usage
Parking Lamps
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Powertrain Relay Input/Electronic
Throttle Control
9
24
10
11
12
Manual Transmission Solenoids
Antilock Braking System
Odd Numbered Fuel Injectors
Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Transmission Control Module (TCM)/
Easy Key Module
56
Electronic Suspension Control
(Option)
Canister Purge Solenoid, Mass Air
Flow Sensor
Air Conditioner Compressor
Even Numbered Fuel Injectors
Windshield Washer
Headlamp Washer
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Fuel Pump
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamp
13
14
J-Style Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan
Battery Main 3
Antilock Brake System
Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning
Blower
Battery Main 2
Starter
Audio Amplifier
Intercooler Pump
Battery Main 1
25
26
27
15
16
17
18
28
29
30
31
32
33
19
20
21
22
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Micro-Relays
Usage
Spare Fuses
Usage
34
35
36
37
38
39
46
55
Horn
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Air Conditioning Compressor
Windshield Washer
Parking Lamps, Foglamps
Front Fog Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Headlamp Washer
Fuel Pump
Diodes
§
§
Usage
Mini-Relays
Usage
Rear Defog
Windshield Wiper High/Low
Windshield Wiper Run/Accessory
Crank
Powertrain Ignition 1
Windshield Wiper On/Off
Low-Beam Headlamp
Diode 1
Wiper
40
41
42
43
44
45
47
Diode 2
§
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine
11.9 qt
12.7 qt
11.3 L
12.0 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Cooling System
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine – Supercharger
Intercooler Cooling System
5.2 qt
4.9 L
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
11.9 qt
11.3 L
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Engine Oil with Filter
6.2L LS3 V8
6.0 qt
10.5 qt
10.5 qt
18.0 gal
5.7 L
9.9 L
9.9 L
68.0 L
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter
Replacement)
6.5 qt
6.2 L
Manual Transmission – Base
Manual Transmission – Z51
Manual Transmission – Z06
Manual Transmission – ZR1
Wheel Nut Torque
3.6 qt
4.2 qt
3.5 L
4.0 L
4.5 qt
4.3 L
4.5 qt
4.3 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
6.2L LS3 V8
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Firing Order
Automatic
Manual
W
0.040 in (1.016 mm)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
6.2L LS9 V8
7.0L LS7 V8
R
E
Manual
Manual
0.040 in (1.016 mm)
0.040 in (1.016 mm)
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
1–8–7–2–6–5–4–3
Engine Data
Engine
Horsepower
Torque
Displacement
Compression Ratio
6.2L LS3 V8 without
option NPP
430 @ 5900 rpm
424 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
428 lb ft @ 4600 rpm
6.2L
10.69:1
6.2L LS3 V8 with
option NPP
436 @ 5900 rpm
6.2L
10.69:1
6.2L LS9 V8
Supercharged
638 @ 6500 rpm
505 @ 6300 rpm
604 lb ft @ 3800 rpm
470 lb ft @ 4800 rpm
6.2L
7.0L
9.10:1
7.0L LS7 V8
11.00:1
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help protect the
environment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a
week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in
making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do
errands, or in many other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
To purchase service information, see Service
on page 5-5.
should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily
be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-14. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message displays,
service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that
vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/
retailer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work using genuine parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the message
displays within 10 months since the vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Except ZR1: Replace engine air cleaner
page 5-28.
•
•
•
•
ZR1 Only: Replace engine air cleaner
page 5-28.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
ZR1 Only: Intercooler system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). See footnote (n).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (l).
Change clutch hydraulic fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years.
See footnote (m).
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
For ZO6 and ZR1 models and vehicles with the Z51
performance package, lubricate the outer ends of both
rear toe-links.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-97 for more information.
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform
use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and
pressure cap.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-58.
(j) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders and body door hinges.
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the
hood, rear compartment, console door, and any folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(m) Drain, flush, and refill clutch hydraulic system at a
regular service interval (I or II) every two years. This
service can be complex; you should have your dealer/
page 5-31.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(n) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
Owner Checks and Services
Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and, on ZR1 models,
check the intercooler coolant level. Add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-34.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation - Tire
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service.
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is
not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
3. With the engine off and without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
{ CAUTION:
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-34.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-34.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
ZR1 Only:
Intercooler
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,
in Canada 88862807).
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Engine Oil
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
Clutch System in Canada 88901244, Super DOT-4
brake fluid.
Hydraulic
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Chassis
Lubrication
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
(Rear Toe-Link
Outer Ends with
ZO6, ZR1, or
Z51 Option)
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
in Canada 88861801).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Manual
Transmission
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Hood and Door
Hinges
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6.2L LS3 V8 and 7.0L LS7 V8 Engines
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
Engine Oil Filter
15776148
25940997
A3077C
A3107C
6.2L LS3 V8 Engines
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
89017524
12626224
12626224
15848592
PF48
UPF-48R
UPF-48R
CF139
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plug
6.2L LS3 V8 Engine
6.2L LS9 V8 Supercharged Engine
7.0L LS7 V8 Engine
12609877
12571165
12571165
41-985
41-104
41-104
Wiper Blades — 20.7 in (52.5 cm)
Driver Side
12335960
12335961
—
—
Passenger Side
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors
of Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over courts in most
jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of
charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred
GM dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
Canada — Customer Assistance
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV
(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Customer Assistance Offices
gmcanada.com
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling for Assistance
Coverage
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver
if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same
type of claim is made many times.
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada
Limited requires pre-authorization, original detailed
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Transportation Program
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
Shuttle Service
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time and
distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight warranty
repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited and must
be supported by original receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state/
provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also
be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,
have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using
the proper equipment and quality replacement parts.
Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or
recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
Service Manuals
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and use.
more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Carbon Monoxide ............................................ 2-14
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-72
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-100
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-43
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-32
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
